Panasonic VDR M70PP User Manual

R
Operating Instructions  
DVD Video Camera  
Model No.  
VDR-M50PP  
VDR-M70PP  
The illustration shows VDR-M70PP.  
Thank you for buying a Panasonic product. Please take the time to become familiar with the operating  
instructions and how it is set up. Keep this manual handy for future reference.  
Quick Start Guide for Software on page 13.  
Be sure to read page 4 before unpacking the provided CD-ROM.  
The method for operating the VDR-M50PP is the same as that for VDR-M70PP.  
For USA assistance, please call: 1-800-211-PANA(7262) or send e-mail to : consumerproducts@panasonic.com  
For Canadian assistance, please call: 1-800-561-5505 or visit us at www.panasonic.ca  
VQT0K92-1  
H0204HM1034  
QR35225  
FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee  
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and use  
only shielded interface cables with ferrite core when connecting to computer or peripheral devices.  
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.  
Declaration of Conformity  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
Panasonic  
VDR-M50PP / VDR-M70PP  
Responsible party: Matsushita Electric Corporation of America  
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094  
Support Contact: Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company  
1-800-211-PANA (7262)  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This class B digital apparatus complies with CANADIAN ICES-003.  
This Product has a fluorescent lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. It also contains  
lead in some components. Disposal of these materials may be regulated in your community  
due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information please contact your  
local authorities, or the Electronics Industries Alliance: <http://www.eiae.org.>  
U.S.A./CANADA CONSUMERS: ATTENTION:  
A lithium ion/polymer battery that is recyclable powers the product  
you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information  
on how to recycle this battery.  
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® 98 Second Edition, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000  
Professional, Windows® XP Home Edition and Windows® XP Professional are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
Intel®, Pentium® Processor, and Celeron® Processor are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
IBM® and PC/AT® are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Other company names and product names listed are trademarks or brand names belonging to each individual  
company.  
SD logo is a trademark.  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, and 4,819,098, licensed for limited viewing.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and  
is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
3
Be sure to read the following before opening  
the CD-ROM package  
This Agreement will take effect at the moment you open the package of the storage device (CD-ROM) provided with this product,  
if you agree to the terms herein.  
Ifyoudo not accept the terms ofthis Agreement, immediatelyreturn the unopened package ofstorage medium andenclosedmaterials  
(printed matter, external package, and all others) to your dealer, or return only the package of storage medium to your dealer.  
This License Agreement certifies that you were granted license in the past.  
License Agreement  
Article 1 Grant of License  
MatsushitaElectricIndustrialCo., Ltd., grantsyouthefollowingrightsforthefollowingproducts(tobereferredtoasThisSoftware”  
hereafter) that you have obtained with this Agreement:  
(a) You may use This Software only on a single piece of equipment. However, if this equipment cannot be used  
because of mechanical problem, you may temporarily use This Software on another piece of equipment.  
(b) Although This Software contains several components that can be run on computer as independent functions, all  
components are licensed as a single product: You may not, by any means, use these components on different  
computers at the same time.  
Article 2 Copyrights  
The copyrights of This Software, attached manual, etc. are owned by the following corporations, and are protected by copyright laws  
in Japan and USA, as well as by other intellectual property and international properties:  
Name of Software  
Copyright Owners  
USB Driver  
Hitachi, Ltd.  
DVD-RAM Driver  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
Sonic Solutions  
DVD-MovieAlbumSE  
MyDVD  
Article 3 Other Rights and Limitations  
(a) You may not copy This Software or any of the printed materials attached, except for duplications to provide back-up or storage.  
(b) Use of This Software by third parties is prohibited, whether by transferring, renting, leasing, lending, moving, or any other  
measures.  
(c) You may not decompile or disassemble this Software.  
(d) Duplication and/or distribution of any files on this storage medium for commercial use is prohibited.  
Article 4 Quality Assurance  
Under no circumstances will Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Hitachi, Ltd., or Sonic Solutions accept any responsibility for  
any damages you may incur from using or being unable to use This Software (including, but not limited to, loss of business profit,  
interruption of business, loss of business information, or other monetary damages).  
Article 5 Termination of Agreement  
If you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement, Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Hitachi, Ltd., and Sonic Solutions  
reserve the right to terminate the Agreement. In such a case, you will be obliged to discard all copies of This Software and its  
components.  
Article 6 Prioritized License Agreement  
When some software programs are installed, the license agreements will be displayed (to be referred to as online license agreement).  
If the online license agreement conflicts with this Agreement, the online license agreement shall have a priority.  
4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
In addition to the careful attention devoted to quality standards in the manufacture of your video product, safety is a major  
factor in the design of every instrument. But, safety is your responsibility too.  
This page lists important information that will help to assure your enjoyment and proper use of DVD Video Camera and  
accessory equipment. Please read it carefully before operating your video product and keep it in a handy place for future  
reference.  
7
Ventilation — Slots and openings in the cabinet are  
provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of  
the video product and to protect it from overheating.  
These openings must not be blocked or covered. The  
openingsshouldneverbeblockedbyplacingthevideo  
product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.  
Thisvideoproductshouldneverbeplacednearorover  
a radiator or heat register. This video product should  
not be placed in a built-in installation such as a  
bookcase orrackunlessproper ventilation isprovided  
or the video product manufacturer's instructions have  
been followed.  
INSTALLATION  
1
Read and Follow Instructions — All the safety and  
operatinginstructionsshouldbereadbeforethevideo  
product is operated. Follow all operating and use  
instructions.  
mekoalbum  
c
a
t
b
o
o
k
MOMO  
album  
yohsinarish  
yohsinarishashin  
kabushiki  
Z
o
o
D
o
c
t
e
r
Z
o
o
D
o
c
t
e
r
tadashiigenkou  
Part  
1
Part  
2
yakamashii  
igarashi  
Why?  
mitono  
kakurai  
tadashiigenkou  
auto moter  
horie youji  
nurie  
mother  
diet  
mito  
mito  
h
i
r
a
y
a
m
o
a
k
i
k
o
s
a
s
a
k
i
a
k
e
m
i
chikako  
kimio  
kuro  
kusano  
oomori  
matuda  
funga funga funga funga  
funga funga funga  
2
3
4
Retain Instructions — The safety and operating  
instructions should be retained for future reference.  
chise  
1
chise  
2
chise  
3
chise  
4
chise  
5
key  
1
key  
2
key  
3
key  
4
key  
5
ebisu  
1
ebisu  
2
momo  
1
momo  
2
momo  
3
junkaikun  
2
nyanko  
1
okubyo  
2
midori  
3
metsuki  
123  
mame  
1
8
Attachments — Do not use attachments unless  
recommended by the video product manufacturer as  
they may cause hazards.  
Heed Warnings — Comply with all warnings on the  
video product and in the operating instructions.  
Power Sources — This video product should be  
operated only from the type of power source indicated  
on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of  
power supply to your home, consult your video dealer  
or local power company. For video products intended  
to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer  
to the operating instructions.  
Caution: Maintain electrical safety. Powerline operated  
equipment or accessories connected to this unit should  
bear the UL listing mark or CSA certification mark on the  
accessory itself and should not have been modified so as  
to defeat the safety features. This will help avoid any  
potential hazard from electric shock or fire. If in doubt,  
contact qualified service personnel.  
5
OverloadingDonotoverload  
wall outlets and extension cords  
asthiscanresultinariskoffireor  
electric shock. Overloaded AC  
outlets and extension cords are  
dangerous, and so are frayed  
9
Water and Moisture — Do not use this video product  
nearwaterfor example, near abath tub, wash bowl,  
kitchensink, orlaundrytub,inawetbasement, ornear  
a swimming pool, and the like.  
10 Accessories— Do not place this video product on an  
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The  
videoproductmayfall,causingseriousinjurytoachild  
or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use  
only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table  
recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the  
video product. Any mounting of the product should  
follow themanufacturer's instructions, and shoulduse  
a mounting accessory recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
power cables, damaged or  
cracked wire insulation and  
broken plugs. They may result in  
a shock or fire hazard. Periodically examine the cord  
and have it replaced by your service technician if  
appearance indicates damage or deteriorated  
insulation.  
6
Power-Cord Protection — Power-supply cords  
shouldberoutedsothattheyarenotlikelytobewalked  
on or pinched by items placed upon or against them,  
paying particular attention to cords at plugs,  
convenience receptacles, and the point where they  
exit from the appliance.  
5
11 An appliance and cart combination  
should be moved with care. Quick  
stops, excessive force, and uneven  
surfaces may cause the appliance  
and cart combination to overturn.  
SERVICE  
16 Servicing — Do not attempt to service this video  
product yourself as opening or removing covers may  
expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.  
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
17 Conditions Requiring Service — Unplug this video  
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to  
qualified service personnel under the following  
conditions.  
12 Power Lines — An outside antenna system should  
notbelocatedinthevicinityofoverheadpowerlinesor  
other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall  
into such power lines or circuits. When installing an  
outside antenna system, extreme care should be  
taken to keep from touching or approaching such  
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be  
fatal. Installing an outdoor antenna can be hazardous  
and should be left to a professional antenna installer.  
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into  
the video product.  
c. If the video product has been exposed to rain or  
water.  
d. If the video product does not operate normally by  
following the operating instructions. Adjust only  
those controls that are covered by the operating  
instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls  
may result in damage and will often require  
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore  
the video product to its normal operation.  
e. If the video product has been dropped or the  
cabinet has been damaged.  
USE  
13 Cleaning — Unplug this video product from the wall  
outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or  
aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
14 ObjectandLiquidEntryNeverpushobjectsofany  
kind into this video product through openings as they  
maytouchdangerousvoltagepointsorshort-outparts  
that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill  
liquid of any kind on the video product.  
f. When the video product exhibits a distinct change  
in performance — this indicates a need for service.  
18 Replacement Parts — When replacement parts are  
required, have the service technician verify that the  
replacements he uses have the same safety  
characteristics as the original parts. Use of  
replacements specified by the video product  
manufacturer can prevent fire, electric shock or other  
hazards.  
19 Safety Check — Upon completion of any service or  
repairs to this video product, ask the service  
technician to perform safety checks recommended by  
the manufacturer to determine that the video product  
is in safe operating condition.  
15 Lightning — For added protection for this video  
product during a lightning storm, or when it is left  
unattended and unused for long periods of time,  
unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the  
antenna or cable-system. This will prevent damage to  
the video product due to lightning and power-line  
surges.  
20 Heat — The product should be situated away from  
heatsourcessuchasradiators, heatregisters, stoves,  
or other products (including amplifiers) that produce  
heat.  
6
Cautions When Using  
Handle the liquid crystal display (LCD) with care:  
The LCD is a very delicate display device: Do not press its surface with force, hit it or prick it with a sharp object.  
If you push the LCD surface, unevenness in display may occur. If unevenness does not disappear, turn the DVD  
Video Camera off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again.  
Do not place the DVD Video Camera with the open LCD screen down.  
Close the LCD monitor when not using the DVD Video Camera.  
Liquid crystal display and viewfinder:  
The LCD screen and viewfinder are the products of highly precise technology. Among the total number of pixels  
(approx. 120,000 pixels for LCD monitor and approx. 110,000 pixels for viewfinder), 0.01% or less pixels may  
be missing(black dots) ormay remain litascolored dots (red, blue, green). Thisshowsthe limitations of the current  
technology, and does not indicate a fault that will interfere with recording.  
The LCD screen and viewfinder will be slightly dimmer than usual when the DVD Video Camera is at low  
temperature, as in cold areas, or immediately after power is turned on. Normal brightness will be restored when  
the temperature inside the DVD Video Camera rises.  
Hold the DVD Video Camera correctly:  
Do not hold the DVD Video Camera by the viewfinder or LCD monitor when lifting it: the viewfinder or LCD  
monitor could detach and the DVD Video Camera may fall.  
Do not subject the DVD Video Camera to impact:  
This DVD Video Camera is a precision machine. Take great care that you do not strike it against a hard object or  
let it fall.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera on a tripod in a place where it is subject to severe vibrations or impact.  
No sand or dust!  
Fine sand or dust entering the DVD Video Camera or AC adaptor could cause malfunctions or defects.  
No water or oil!  
Water or oil entering the DVD Video Camera or AC adaptor could cause electric shock,  
malfunctions or defects.  
7
Heat on surface of product:  
The surface of the DVD Video Camera will be slightly warm, but this does not indicate a fault.  
Screen on connected TV:  
Never leave the disc navigation screen, still image or camera image displayed on your TV to which the DVD Video  
Camera is connected: Doing so could result in displayed image retention or phosphor degradation of TV screen.  
Be careful of ambient temperature:  
UsingtheDVDVideoCamerainaplacewherethetemperatureis over 140ºF (40°C)or under 32ºF (0°C) will result  
in abnormal recording/playback.  
Take care that the temperature of this DVD Video Camera, when connected to a PC does not rise excessively  
(reference for usage: approx. 30 minutes at about 86ºF (30ºC).  
Do not leave the DVD Video Camera on a beach or in a closed vehicle where the temperature is very high for a  
long time: This could cause malfunctions.  
Do not point directly at the sun:  
If direct sunlight strikes the lens or viewfinder, the DVD Video Camera could malfunction or a fire could occur.  
Do not leave the DVD Video Camera with the LCD screen exposed to direct sunlight: This could cause  
malfunctions.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera near TV or radio:  
This could cause noise to appear on the TV screen or in radio broadcasts.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera near strong radio waves or magnetism:  
If the DVD Video Camera is used near strongradio waves or magnetism, such as neara radio wave toweror electric  
appliances, noise could enter video andaudio that are being recorded. During playback of normally recorded video  
and audio, noise may also be present in picture and sound.  
At worst the DVD Video Camera could malfunction.  
Do not expose the DVD Video Camera to soot or steam:  
Thick soot or steam could damage the DVD Video Camera case or cause malfunctions.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera near corrosive gas:  
IftheDVDVideoCameraisusedinaplacewherethereisdenseexhaustgasgeneratedbygasolineordieselengines,  
or corrosive gas such as hydrogen sulfide, the external or internal terminals could corrode, disabling normal  
operation, or the battery connecting terminals could corrode, so that power will not turn on.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera near ultrasonic humidifier:  
Calcium and other chemicals dissolved in water could scatter in the air, and white particles could adhere to the  
optical head of the DVD Video Camera, which could cause it to operate abnormally.  
Do not expose the DVD Video Camera to insecticide:  
Insecticide entering the DVD Video Camera could dirty the lens in the laser pickup block, and in such a case the  
DVD Video Camera might not operate normally. Turn the DVD Video Camera off and cover it with vinyl sheet,  
etc. before using insecticide.  
Do not use an optional 8 cm CD lens cleaner:  
Cleaning the lens is not necessary when using this DVD Video Camera in the usual way.  
Using 8 cm CD lens cleaner could cause this DVD Video Camera to malfunction.  
Do not touch the lens in laser pickup block.  
If you touch the lens in the laser pickup block directly it may cause malfunctions. Laser pickup block is not a  
compensable part. Therefore, pay much attention when operating this camera.  
8
Be careful of moisture condensation:  
When you move the DVD Video Camera between places where the difference in temperatures is great - such as  
entering a lodge from a ski slope or going out of a cooled room or vehicle - condensation (vapor in air warmed or  
cooled to water droplets) could occur on the lens and/or inside the DVD Video Camera. If condensation occurs,  
do not open the cover of disc or card insertion block if possible. If condensation occurs on the lens, wipe it off with  
a soft, dry cloth. Even if the external surface of DVD Video Camera has dried, condensation may remain inside:  
Turn the DVD Video Camera off and leave it in a dry place for at least 1-2 hours before using it again.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera for a long, uninterrupted period of time:  
This DVD Video Camera cannot be used for a long time continuously as a surveillance camera/monitor. If you use  
the DVD Video Camera for a long continuous period of time, the temperature of the DVD Video Camera could  
exceed its proper limit and the recording/playbackoperation could be slowed down: In this case, turn it off and wait  
for a while before using it again.  
Take care that the temperature of this DVD Video Camera, when connected to a PC, does not rise excessively  
[reference for usage: approx. 30 minutes at about 86ºF (30ºC).]  
DonotturntheDVDVideoCameraoffwhiletheACCESS/PCindicatororCARDACCESS  
indicator is lit or blinking:  
The ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking to  
show that data is being written to disc or card, or being read from it.  
At this time, do not do any of the following, so as not to damage the  
data:  
CARD  
ACCESS  
indicator  
Remove battery pack  
Disconnect AC adaptor  
Plug or unplug USB cable  
ACCESS/PC  
indicator  
Remove disc or card  
Subject DVD Video Camera to severe vibrations or impact.  
Forcefully open or close the LCD monitor  
If you turn the DVD Video Camera off while the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking, turn  
it on again with the disc or card loaded in it: Repair of the disc or card will be executed automatically (see page 152).  
Do not wipe the DVD Video Camera case with benzene or thinner:  
The coating of case could peel off or the case surface could deteriorate.  
When using a chemical cleaning cloth, follow the instructions.  
Also read the instructions attached with optional accessories:  
For optional accessories, observe the cautions and follow instruction manuals attached.  
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.  
9
Cautions When Storing  
Do not leave the DVD Video Camera in a place where the temperature is very high for a  
long period of time:  
The temperature inside a closed vehicle or trunk can become very high in a hot season. If you leave the DVD Video  
Camera in such a place, it could malfunction or the case could be damaged. Do not expose the DVD Video Camera  
to direct sunlight or place it near a heater.  
Do not store the DVD Video Camera in a place where the humidity is high or in a dusty  
place:  
Dust entering the DVD Video Camera could cause malfunctions. If humidity is high, the lens could become moldy,  
and the DVD Video Camera could become inoperative. It is recommended that you put the DVD Video Camera  
in a box together with a desiccant when storing it in a closet, etc.  
Do not store the DVD Video Camera in a place subject to strong magnetism or intense  
vibrations:  
This could cause malfunctions.  
Detach the battery pack from the DVD Video Camera and store it in a cool place:  
Leaving the battery pack attached or storing it at high temperature could shorten its life.  
Suggestions and Restrictions  
Make a trial recording:  
Always make a trial recording before doing actual recording to make sure that recording is normal.  
Data that have not been stored normally because of a defect in the DVD Video Camera cannot be restored.  
It is recommended that you use a DVD-RAM disc from which recorded contents can be deleted for trial recording.  
Do not use the DVD Video Camera for professional applications:  
This DVD Video Camera is designed and produced for home-use recording and playback.  
The recorded contents cannot be compensated for:  
Panasonic cannot compensate for any damages caused when recording is not made normally or recorded contents  
cannot be played back because of a defect in the DVD Video Camera, disc or card. Also, Panasonic cannot be  
responsible for your recorded video and audio.  
IfyouorathirdpartymakeamistakewhenhandlingthisDVDVideoCamera, disc, card, etc., therecordedcontents  
may be lost. We cannot be responsible for compensation for damage due to loss of recorded contents.  
Copyright:  
Data recorded on the disc or card in this DVD Video Camera using other digital/analog media or devices are  
protectedbythecopyrightactandcannotbeusedwithoutpermissionoftheownerofcopyright, except forpersonal  
enjoyment. Be aware that recording is restricted for some demonstrations, performances and exhibitions, even for  
personal enjoyment.  
10  
Read This First  
To guide you, we've included the following six chapters.  
The section on “Setups” explains how to set up the  
DVD Video Camera, battery pack, and set the date/  
time.  
We want this manual to be as helpful as possible,  
so it includes two easy ways to find the information  
you need:  
The section on “Basic Techniques” explains the basic  
operation of this DVD Video Camera-recording of  
movies, still images, external input, and playback of  
recorded images.  
The section on “Advanced Techniques” explains  
settings on this DVD Video Camera for more  
advanced usage.  
The section on “Disc Navigation” explains editing  
with Disc Navigation: Refer to this section when  
finalizing DVD-R disc and initializing DVD-RAM  
disc.  
The section on “Installing Software” explains the  
contents of provided CD-ROM and how to install the  
included software.  
A quick index for the information you use most often  
(this page).  
A detailed table of contents directing you to specific  
information quickly (see pages 15-17).  
Get to know your DVD Video Camera by using this  
manual,andgettoknowPanasonic.Weappreciate  
your business.  
Quick Index  
Available Discs................................................. 28  
Recording Movie.............................................. 51  
Playing Back.................................................... 59  
Connecting to a TV.......................................... 69  
Functions Available with Disc Navigation ........ 99  
Installing Software ......................................... 130  
“Subsidiary Information” includes an introduction to  
products sold separately, proper cleaning, and  
troubleshooting.  
With this DVD Video Camera you can view the picture being recorded or the playback picture on the LCD monitor or  
in the viewfinder. Opening or closing the LCD monitor switches the picture to appear on the LCD monitor or in the  
viewfinder. The following text describes operation assuming that the viewfinder is used as a monitor device.  
About This Manual  
lDisplays in this manual  
Understand that the displays in the manual may not appear exactly as those you will actually see in the viewfinder  
or on the LCD screen.  
lNotation of cancel button  
Press the stop/cancel button to stop your operation midway, or return the menu screen to the preceding one. The  
expression “press the g button” will be used in this text.  
l1, 2 and 3marks beside headings  
Some functions of this DVD Video Camera are unavailable with disc or card. Refer to the marks at right above each  
function to identify whether the disc or card is compatible with the function. Refer to these marks and identify the  
functions and operation to match the disc or card you use.  
lIllustrations in this manual  
Although the external appearances of VDR-M50PP and VDR-M70PP are different, the method of operating both  
models is identical.  
The illustrations of VDR-M70PP are used in this text.  
11  
Introduction  
lYou can record even during playback (page 51)  
Unlike tape devices, you do not need to search for the recording start position or locate the beginning of a blank  
portion.  
New recording will not overwrite any previously recorded data.  
Recorded scenes  
If you stop playback midway and start recording, overwrite will not occur.  
lYou can immediately play back desired recorded scenes (page 97)  
You do not need to rewind, unlike recorders using tape.  
You can select any scene you want and immediately play it back (using Disc Navigation function).  
lUse Disc Navigation to create your original movie (page 116)  
You can delete unnecessary scenes, move any scenes, etc., and create your original movie work (Play List).  
Before editing  
After editing  
lYou can easily edit scenes (page 77) lCreate original DVDs on PC  
(page 141)  
You can use a DVD-R disc to create an original DVD,  
using the provided software CD-ROM.  
The created DVD disc can be played back on a DVD  
player, DVD-ROM drive, etc.  
UsingthisDVDVideoCamera,youcancollectscenesof  
your child, for example, on a play list using the Disc  
Navigation function and create an original movie: Then  
simplyplaybacktheplaylistanddubitonVCR.Itisalso  
easy to make any number of identical tapes.  
Until now, you had to  
repeatedly press  
buttons.  
With DVD, you can simply  
play back this DVD Video  
Camera, and press the  
record button on VCR.  
Original DVD being  
created  
Playback of DVD  
12  
Quick Start Guide for Software  
Features  
The following software programs are contained on the provided CD-ROM.  
Software  
Feature  
USB Driver  
Install this driver when using the provided USB Cable to connect this  
DVD Video Camera to a PC.  
DVD-RAM Driver  
Install this driver when using stills and images recorded on a DVD-RAM  
disc on a PC.  
DVD-MovieAlbumSE  
By combining DVD-MovieAlbumSE with VDR-M50PP/VDR-M70PP DVD  
Video Camera, it is possible to use playback, recording and editing on  
the DVD-RAM disc. It is also possible to transfer extracted data and title  
information etc. to MyDVD.  
MyDVD  
Use this software when creating a DVD-Video disc from motion images  
edited using DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
Confirming the environment of connecting equipment: see page 130.  
Installation Guide (see page 130 for details)  
1
Installing USB Driver.  
Be sure you do not connect the USB Cable before installing the USB Driver.  
Insert the provided CD-ROMinto the PC and “Setup Menu” will activate: you can install the USB Driver from  
the “Setup Menu”.  
After the installation completes, the PC can recognize the DVD Video Camera when the DVD Video Camera  
and the PC are connected with the USB cable.  
2
Install the software (DVD-RAM Driver, MyDVD and DVD-MovieAlbumSE).  
The software can also be installed from the “Setup Menu”.  
Note:  
If the “Setup Menu” does not appear, double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
Suggestions for using software (see page 141 for details)  
1
Connect this DVD Video Camera to the PC as illustrated below.  
Please ensure a DVD-RAM disc with recorded material is loaded into the DVD Video Camera before  
proceeding.  
To USB port  
2
Edit motion image files using DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
You can edit motion image files on the DVD-RAM disc.  
13  
3
4
Export motion image data to PC using DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
MyDVD program will automatically start. (see page 142 for details)  
5
6
Edit motion images and introduce interactive DVD menus using MyDVD Software.  
Insert a new DVD-R disc into the DVD Video Camera.  
When making an original DVD-R disc using MyDVD software, a message for initialization appears on the  
LCD of DVD Video Camera. Select “No” and then follow the instructions on the screen of your PC to make  
the original DVD-R disc. Do not perform initialization on DVD Video Camera when using a DVD-R disc with  
your computer.  
7
Write motion image files to the DVD-R disc with MyDVD.  
Write edited motion images to an 8 cm DVD-R disc in this DVD Video Camera using MyDVD software.  
Cautions for use  
When you are making a recording on a new DVD-R disc in your DVD Video Camera, you must initialize the disc  
before recording motion images. DVD-RAM disc and Card do not require initialization.  
DVD-R discs are a one time write format; therefore when you write information to the DVD-R disc with  
DVD-MovieAlbum or MyDVD, you cannot edit it again.  
When using DVD-MovieAlbum software on Windows® 2000 Professional / XP Home Edition / XP  
Professional, log on to your PC as Administrator or with a login name equally authorized. If you log on with  
a login name other than Administrator, you cannot use DVD-MovieAlbum.  
Set the display resolution to 1024 ~ 768 (16 bits color) when using DVD-MovieAlbum.  
Display Settings method as follows:  
Select “Start” >> “Settings” (except Windows® XP Home Edition / XP Professional)>> “Control Panel” >> “Display”  
and select “Settings” tab on “Display”, and then adjust “Screen Resolution” and “Color quality” to the above.  
MyDVD included in the provided CD-ROM does not contain the slideshowsfunction. Therefore you can not  
edit stills on MyDVD.  
Depending on the condition of your PC, it may take a long time to install the software.  
14  
Table of Contents  
Using DVD Video Camera  
with AC adaptor................................................ 45  
Inserting and Removing Disc........................... 46  
Inserting Disc....................................................... 46  
Removing Disc .................................................... 48  
Inserting and Removing Card.......................... 49  
Important Information ........................................2  
Be sure to read the following before  
opening the CD-ROM package ......................4  
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ...........................5  
Cautions When Using........................................7  
Cautions When Storing....................................10  
Suggestions and Restrictions ..........................10  
Read This First ................................................11  
About This Manual...........................................11  
Introduction......................................................12  
Quick Start Guide for Software........................13  
Table of Contents ............................................15  
Checking Provided Accessories ......................18  
Names of Parts................................................19  
Basic Techniques  
Basic Operation of DVD Video Camera .......... 50  
Turning DVD Video Camera On or Off................ 50  
Recording Movie.............................................. 51  
Recording Stills................................................ 52  
Compensating for Backlight............................. 53  
On-Screen Information .................................... 54  
Information Display during Recording ................. 54  
Zooming........................................................... 57  
Setting Up the Battery Pack.............................23  
Charging Battery Pack......................................... 23  
Try to Record and Play Back Using Disc  
Macro Recording................................................. 58  
Using Conversion Lens  
(Optional-User Provided).................................. 58  
(Video and Photo)............................................24  
Playing Back.................................................... 59  
Try to Record and Play Back Using Card  
(Photo).............................................................26  
Discs and Cards ..............................................28  
Playing Back........................................................ 59  
Playback from Start of Disc or Card.................... 60  
Search Playback of Movie................................... 60  
Frame Advance/Frame Back/Slow Playback of  
Movie................................................................ 60  
Skip Playback of Movie ....................................... 61  
Playing Back Stills............................................... 61  
Jumping to Specified Point (Go To) .................... 62  
Available Discs .................................................... 28  
Information on DVD-R Disc ................................. 29  
Examples of Discs that Cannot be  
Used on this DVD Video Camera ..................... 29  
Handling Discs..................................................... 30  
Available Cards ................................................... 31  
On-Screen Information Display ....................... 63  
Information Display during Playback................... 63  
Manually Focusing Subject.............................. 64  
Focusing during Recording ................................. 64  
Adjusting Exposure Manually .......................... 66  
Using Auto Function ........................................ 67  
Using External Microphone ............................. 68  
Setting Video Flash (Only for VDR-M70PP).... 68  
Viewing on TV Screen..................................... 69  
Storage Capacity of Disc or Card ....................32  
Recordable Time of Movie (Video)...................... 32  
Recordable Stills (Photos) on Disc...................... 33  
Recordable Stills (Photos) on Card ..................... 33  
Size and Quality of Photos .................................. 33  
Setups  
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera .................34  
Holding DVD Video Camera................................ 34  
Attaching Shoulder Belt....................................... 35  
Attaching Lens Cap ............................................. 35  
Inserting Battery into Remote  
Connecting to a TV.............................................. 69  
Viewing on TV Screen......................................... 70  
Playback on DVD Video Recorder/Player ....... 71  
Controller .......................................................... 36  
Removing Battery from Remote Controller.......... 36  
Viewing Subject Through Viewfinder................... 37  
Viewing Image on LCD Monitor Screen .............. 38  
Closing LCD Monitor ........................................... 39  
Setting Date and Time......................................... 40  
Changing Display Format of Date  
To Customers Who Have a DVD Video  
Recorder with hard disk................................... 71  
Playback on DVD Player ................................. 72  
Removing from/and Replacing in Round  
DVD Holder................................................... 73  
How to Remove Disc........................................... 73  
Replacing Disc in Round DVD Holder................. 74  
When the Hinge of Round DVD  
Holder Comes off ............................................. 74  
Disc Cleaning ...................................................... 74  
and Time........................................................... 41  
About the Battery Pack....................................42  
Attaching Battery Pack to DVD Video Camera.... 42  
Removing Battery Pack....................................... 42  
Battery Remaining Level Indicator....................... 44  
Efficient Use of Battery Pack............................... 44  
Recording (Dubbing) Images........................... 75  
Recording (Dubbing) Images from  
Other Video Device .......................................... 75  
15  
Recording (Dubbing) Images from  
Directing Scenes Effectively  
(Edit - Fade) ................................................... 105  
Combining Multiple Scenes  
(Edit - Combine) ............................................. 106  
Dividing Movies (Edit - Divide) .......................... 107  
Copying Stills on DVD-RAM Disc to Card  
(Copy)............................................................. 108  
Locking Scenes on Card (Lock) ........................ 109  
Designating Scenes to be Printed  
Other Video Cameras....................................... 76  
Recording (Dubbing) Images on Other Video  
Devices............................................................. 77  
Advanced Techniques  
Understanding Flow of Menus.........................78  
Setting Up Camera Functions..........................80  
Selecting Shooting Mode to Match the Subject  
(Switching Program AE Mode) ......................... 80  
Adjusting Color (White Balance).......................... 81  
Using the Electronic Image Stabilizer (EIS)......... 83  
Reducing Wind Noise during Recording  
(DPOF)........................................................... 110  
Selecting Scenes Using Menu Screen  
(Select)........................................................... 111  
Displaying Information Using Menu Screen  
(Detail)........................................................... 112  
(Wind Cut)......................................................... 83  
Setting to Wide TV Screen Mode  
Program......................................................... 113  
What is “program”?............................................ 113  
Switching to Thumbnail Display of Specific Date  
(Switch) .......................................................... 113  
Playing Back Program (Play) ............................ 114  
Changing Title of Program (Title) ...................... 114  
(Wide) (Only for VDR-M70PP).......................... 84  
Setting Up Record Functions...........................86  
Switching Movie Quality (VIDEO Mode).............. 86  
Switching Quality of Still Image (Quality)............. 87  
Receiving Image from Another Device  
(Input Source)................................................... 88  
Switching External Input Recording Method  
(PHOTO Input)................................................. 88  
Self Timer ............................................................ 89  
Setting OSD Output On or Off  
Play List......................................................... 116  
What is “Play List”? ........................................... 116  
Creating New Play List (Create)........................ 116  
Switching to Display of Each Play List  
(Switch) .......................................................... 117  
Playing Back a Play List (Play).......................... 117  
Adding Scenes to Play List  
(On-Screen Display) ......................................... 90  
LCD Setup .......................................................91  
(Editing Play List) ........................................... 118  
Deleting Scenes from Play List  
Setting Brightness of LCD Screen  
(Brightness) ...................................................... 91  
Setting Color Density of LCD Screen  
(Color Level) .................................................... 91  
(Editing Play List) ........................................... 119  
Adding Scenes Using Submenu for Editing  
(Editing Play List) ........................................... 119  
Deleting Scenes Using Submenu for Editing  
(Editing Play List) .......................................... 120  
Selecting Scenes Using Submenu for Editing  
(Editing Play List) ........................................... 120  
Arranging Order of Scenes (Move) ................... 121  
Changing Title of Play List (Title) ...................... 122  
Deleting Play List (Delete)................................. 122  
Initial Settings ..................................................92  
Switching Operating Sound On or Off  
(Beep)............................................................... 92  
Turning DVD Video Camera Off Automatically  
(Power Save).................................................... 92  
Turning Record LED On or Off  
(Record LED).................................................... 93  
Changing Display Language  
(Language) ....................................................... 93  
Resetting Menu Settings to Defaults  
(Reset).............................................................. 94  
Go To............................................................. 123  
Top (End) .......................................................... 123  
Disc or Card Management............................. 124  
Verifying Remaining Free Space on  
Disc or Card (Capacity).................................. 124  
Protecting Disc from Writing  
Disc Navigation  
Using Disc Navigation......................................95  
Starting or Terminating Disc Navigation.............. 95  
Playing Back from Disc Navigation Screen ......... 97  
Selecting Multiple Scenes ................................... 98  
Selecting Consecutive Scenes Together............. 98  
Disc Navigation Menu......................................99  
(Protect Disc).................................................. 124  
Initializing DVD-RAM Disc or Card  
(Format Disc. Format card) ............................ 125  
Updating Control Information of DVD-RAM Disc  
(Update Control Info.)..................................... 126  
Finalizing DVD-R Disc (Finalize Disc)............... 127  
Other Functions (Others)............................... 128  
Functions Available with Disc Navigation............ 99  
Understanding Flow of Disc  
Navigation Menu............................................. 100  
Displaying Movies or Stills Independently  
(Category) ...................................................... 128  
Playing Back Scenes Repeatedly  
(Repeat Play) ................................................. 128  
Slide Show (Continuous Playback of Stills)....... 129  
Scene.............................................................101  
Deleting Scenes (Delete)................................... 101  
Changing Images for Thumbnails  
(Edit - Thumbnail) ........................................... 103  
Playing Back by Skipping Scenes  
(Edit - Skip)..................................................... 104  
Arranging Order of Scenes (Edit - Move) .......... 104  
16  
Installing Software  
Compatible PC for use with DVD Video Camera:  
VDR-M50PP/VDR-M70PP.............................130  
Operations will not be guaranteed under the  
following conditions.....................................130  
Contents on Provided CD-ROM ....................131  
Installing USB Driver ......................................... 133  
Installing DVD-RAM Driver................................ 135  
Installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE.......................... 138  
Installing MyDVD............................................... 140  
Creating DVD Video on PC from DVD-RAM  
Disc Recorded on DVD Video Camera.......141  
Uninstalling Software.....................................143  
Uninstalling USB Driver..................................... 143  
Deleting Other Applications............................... 144  
Supplementary Information  
Introduction to Optional Accessories .............145  
Video Camera Accessories ............................... 145  
Information on Round DVD Holder.................... 146  
Cleaning.........................................................147  
Terminology...................................................148  
Before Requesting Service............................150  
Error Messages .............................................152  
Troubleshooting.............................................158  
System Reset ................................................164  
Major Specifications.......................................165  
Request for Service Notice (USA Only).........168  
Limited Warranty (For USA Customers)........169  
Customer Services Directory.........................170  
Warranty (For Canadian Customers).............171  
17  
Checking Provided Accessories  
Make sure that you found all the following accessories in the package:  
Battery Pack (CGA-DU14A):  
Portable power supply for this DVD Video  
Camera. Charge it before use.  
AC Adaptor/Charger (PV-DAC13):  
Used to power the DVD Video Camera from WhenpoweringtheDVDVideoCamerafrom  
AC outlet, or charge battery pack.  
DC Cord:  
householdACoutlet,usethiscordtoconnect  
the DVD Video Camera and AC adaptor.  
Power Cable:  
Remote Controller (VEQ3993):  
Button Type Battery (CR2025):  
Connect between household AC outlet and UsetocontroltheDVDVideoCamerafroma To power the remote controller.  
AC adaptor.  
distance.  
WARNING: Keep  
this battery away  
from children. If  
swallowed, consult  
a physician  
immediately for  
emergency  
treatment.  
AV/S Input/Output Cable: (EW12522)  
Used when playing back the DVD Video  
Shoulder Belt:  
Lens Cap and Lens Cap String:  
Attach to the DVD Video Camera to hang it Attach the lens cap when not recording, to  
Camera picture to a TV screen, or input or from shoulder.  
output video from/to another video device.  
protect the lens.  
8 cm DVD-RAM Disc (in Round DVD  
Holder):  
Software CD-ROM:  
Use this CD-ROM on PC when connecting  
USB Cable: (EW12531)  
To record video (movie) on this DVD Video the DVD Video Camera to PC.  
Camera.  
18  
Names of Parts  
5
6
7
8
9
N
DISC  
NAVIGATI
SELECT  
MENU  
u
y
t
i
1
2
3
4
10  
11  
A/V  
MIC  
13  
12  
BATTERY EJECT  
(Inside the cover)  
(Bottom)  
1
Infrared receiver (P. 37)  
9
Hot shoe (P. 68)  
When the remote controller is used to operate the  
DVD Video Camera, this receiver will receive the  
infrared signal.  
Only for VDR-M70PP:  
Attach the optional video flash here.  
10 AV input/output jack (P. 69, 75)  
11 External microphone jack (P. 68)  
2
3
Lens cap string attachment hole (P. 35)  
Recording indicator (P. 93)  
The red indicator will light during recording.  
12 2.5" type Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)  
(inside) (P. 7, 38)  
4
5
6
Internal stereo microphone (P. 51)  
Lock cover and Lock button (P. 34)  
13 BATTERY EJECT switch (P. 42)  
The BATTERY EJECT switch is located on the  
bottom of this DVD Video Camera: Slide it when  
removing the battery pack.  
Optical 10x zoom lens (VDR-M70PP)  
Optical 18× zoom lens (VDR-M50PP)  
(P. 57)  
AlthoughtheexternalappearancesofVDR-M50PP  
and VDR-M70PP are different, the method of  
operating both models is identical. VDR-M70PP  
illustrations are used in this manual.  
7
8
Lens hood (P. 58)  
Always remove this lens hood when using optional-  
user provided tele-conversion or wide-conversion  
lens.  
Zoom lever (P. 57)  
Push the lever to the T side for telephoto, or to the W  
side for wide-angle.  
19  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
S
S
E
C
C
A
D
R
A
C
ACCESS/PC  
DISC EJECT  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25 26  
27  
14 Viewfinder (P. 7, 37)  
15 Diopter control (P. 37)  
22 Power switch (P. 50, 51, 52)  
23 Shoulder belt attachments portion (P. 35)  
To adjust the focus of image appearing in the  
viewfinder (Pull out the viewfinder.).  
24 LOCK switch (P. 25, 51)  
In  
to lock the power switch so that it does not  
accidentally move to  
From mode, youcannotmovetheLOCKswitch  
mode, set the LOCK switch to  
(to the left)  
16 ACCESS/PC indicator (P. 9, 51, 52)  
Will blink or light when the disc in DVD Video  
Camera is accessed (write or read is executed) or the  
DVD Video Camera is connected to PC.  
.
to the left to lock the power switch.  
17 DISC EJECT lever (P. 46)  
25 Speaker (P. 59)  
Press and release this lever to open the disc guide.  
26 Grip Belt (Free Style Grip Belt) (P. 34)  
27 Disc insertion block (P. 46)  
18 CARD ACCESS indicator (P. 9, 52)  
19 Card insertion block (P. 49)  
20 Battery attachment platform (P. 42)  
21 Record (REC) button (P. 51, 52)  
20  
DISC  
NAVIGATION  
37  
DISC  
NAVIGATION  
28  
29  
30  
31  
SELECT  
MENU  
SELECT  
MENU  
BACK  
LIGHT  
38  
39  
40  
AUTO  
FOCUS  
EXPOSURE  
BACK  
LIGHT  
AUTO  
FOCUS  
EXPOSURE  
DISPLAY  
VOL  
RESET  
DISPLAY  
VOL  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
28 AUTO button (P. 67)  
35 USB port (To PC)  
To switch the DVD Video Camera to full automatic.  
36 Joystick (P. 40, 59, 79)  
29 FOCUS button (P. 64)  
To switch between manual focus and auto-focus.  
30 EXPOSURE button (P. 66)  
Press this button to adjust the exposure.  
31 BACK LIGHT (backlight compensation)  
button (P. 53)  
Move the joysticktoselectascene ormenuitem, and  
then press the center (A) to play back the scene,  
pause it, or select an option from the menu.  
Press this button when subject is being illuminated  
from behind.  
37 DISC NAVIGATION button (P. 95)  
38 SELECT button (P. 98, 111)  
32 DISPLAY (Screen display) button (P. 63)  
Pressthisbutton to displaythedetails ofimagebeing  
played back or camera setting status, or to switch the  
display off.  
39 MENU button (P. 40, 79, 101)  
Press this button to display the menu for setting  
camera functions and Disc Navigation.  
The camera menu will appear even if disc is not  
loaded.  
33 Volume control buttons (VOL)/ S R buttons  
(P. 59, 64, 66)  
To adjust the volume of sound from speaker, etc.  
40 Stop/cancel button (P. 11, 59, 79)  
34 RESET button (P. 164)  
To end playback or cancel menu setting .  
Toreset all settingsto defaults(status whenthe DVD  
Video Camera was shipped from the factory).  
21  
47  
48  
41  
42  
43  
49  
50  
51  
44  
52  
53  
45  
46  
54  
55  
41 REC button (P. 51, 52)  
47 ZOOM T button (P. 57)  
42 DIGITAL ZOOM button (P. 57)  
43 Reverse skip button (P. 61)  
44 Reverse search button (P. 60)  
45 DISC NAVIGATION button (P. 95)  
46 MENU button (P. 40, 79, 101)  
48 ZOOM W button (P. 57)  
49 Forward Search button (P. 60)  
50 Play/pause button (P. 59)  
51 Forward skip button (P. 61)  
52 DISPLAY button (P. 63)  
53 Stop button (P. 11, 59, 79)  
54 DELETE button (P. 101)  
55 SELECT button (P. 98, 111)  
* The buttons on remote controller will function the same as those on DVD Video Camera.  
22  
Setting Up the Battery Pack  
The CGA-DU14A battery pack provided with this DVD Video Camera has not been charged at purchase  
time: Charge it before using the DVD Video Camera.  
Note:  
Be sure to use the specified battery packCGA-DU14A (provided)for the DVD Video Camera:usingother batteries could  
cause the DVD Video Camera to malfunction, or result in fire.  
Be sure to use the specified AC adaptor to charge the battery pack: using other chargers could cause electric shock  
or fire.  
Charge the battery pack at temperatures of 50 - 86°F (10-30°C).  
Charging Battery Pack  
Use the provided AC adaptor to charge the battery pack.  
3
Attach the battery pack to AC adaptor.  
1
2
Connect the power cable to AC adaptor.  
Plug the power cable into AC outlet.  
Note:  
Whenchargingabatterypack,unplugtheDCcordfromthe  
DC output jack on AC adaptor.  
The CHARGE indicator on AC adaptor will light.  
Battery pack  
Power cable  
POWER  
indicator  
POWER and  
CHARGE indicators  
AC adaptor  
CHARGE indicator  
lBattery pack charge status  
You can find out the charge status of the battery pack by checking the CHARGE indicator on the AC adaptor:  
Charge status  
During charge  
CHARGE indicator  
Lit  
Charge complete  
Goes out  
Note:  
If the CHARGE indicator does not light when the AC  
adaptor is plugged into household AC outlet, unplug it  
from household AC outlet, wait a few moments, and then  
plug it into household AC outlet again. If the CHARGE  
indicator still does not light, the AC adaptor may be faulty.  
Unplug it from household AC outlet and consult your  
dealer.  
See “Troubleshooting” on page 158, when the CHARGE  
indicator blinks.  
23  
12  
Try to Record and Play Back Using Disc (Video and  
Photo)  
It is recommended that you use a DVD-RAM disc for trial recording, since  
you can delete the recorded contents (See page 28).  
Before You Begin  
You can record both videos and photos on DVD-RAM disc; only videos on DVD-R disc.  
1
Connect power supply (P. 45).  
Power cable  
DC cord  
AC adaptor  
Connect them in sequence of the digits.  
2
Insert a disc (P. 46).  
1.Press down the DISC EJECT lever once and  
release it.  
3.Insertthedisc,inRoundDVDHolder,intothedisc  
guide until it stops.  
DISC EJECT  
2.Gently open the cover until it stops.  
PUSH CLOSE  
portion  
Disc cover  
24  
3
Start recording (P. 51).  
1.Open the LCD monitor (See page 38).  
3.Set the LOCK switch to (to the left) to prevent  
accidental switching of recording mode.*  
* Only in  
mode.  
2.While holding the switch at the center of power  
switch, set the switch to “  
” or “  
”.  
4.Press the REC button.  
Recording will start.  
PressingtheRECbuttonagainwillstoprecording.  
REC button  
Note:  
When using an unformatted disc, format (initialize) it on this DVD Video Camera.  
If unformatted disc is inserted into this DVD Video Camera, a message will appear: Format the disc following the  
instructions on screen (P. 47, 125). Initializing the disc will erase all the recorded contents: make sure the contents  
on disc are not valuable before initializing the disc.  
4
View the playback of recorded content on LCD monitor.  
1.Open the LCD monitor (See page 38).  
2.After recording is finished, press the A button.  
The recorded scene will be played back.  
3.Press the g button to stop playback.  
25  
3
Try to Record and Play Back Using Card (Photo)  
Only photos can be recorded on card.  
1
Connect power supply (P. 45).  
Power cable  
DC cord  
AC adaptor  
Connect them in sequence of the digits.  
2
Insert a card (P. 49).  
1.Open the cover of card insertion slot with power  
turned off.  
3.Insert the card all the way until it locks.  
2.Put in a card.  
26  
3
Start recording (P. 52).  
1.Open the LCD monitor (See page 38).  
3.While holding the switch at the center of power  
switch, set the switch to “ ”.  
4.Press the REC button.  
Pressing REC once will record one photo.  
2.Set the LOCK switch to  
(to the right).  
REC button  
4
View the playback of recorded content on LCD monitor.  
1.Open the LCD monitor (P. 38).  
2.PresstheA buttoninrecordingpausestatus:the  
recorded scene will be played back.  
3.Press the g button to stop playback.  
27  
Discs and Cards  
The following table lists the storage media (discs and cards) that can be used on this DVD Video Camera  
and the functions which are available with them:  
Media  
SD Memory Card/  
MultiMediaCard  
Function  
DVD-RAM disc  
DVD-R disc  
Recording movie  
Recording still  
l
l
l
l
-
-
l
l
Deleting recorded image  
-
Editing on this DVD  
Video Camera  
l
-
-
-
*2  
*1  
Playback on DVD player  
l
-
Playback on DVD video  
recorder  
*3  
*2  
*4  
l
l
-
l: Functions available;  
-: Not available  
*1: Can be played back on DVD players with the  
mark.  
*2: Must be finalized (see “Terminology”, P. 148) on this DVD Video Camera before DVD-R disc can be played back on  
DVD player or DVD-RAM recorder (See page 127). May not be playable on some DVD players.  
*3: Compatible with DVD video recorders that conform to 8 cm DVD-RAM.  
*4: Some DVD video recorders incorporate a device that can play back SD memory card and multimedia card.  
Available Discs  
Usable discs and logos  
DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1 (8 cm)  
Shape  
In Round DVD  
Holder  
DVD-R  
[for General Ver. 2.0 (8 cm)]  
The Round DVD Holder cannot be used on DVD Video  
Cameras that use square type adapters.  
Image data edited on PC and certain types of image data  
may not be visible on this DVD Video Camera.  
The image data recorded on another device may not be  
playable on this DVD Video Camera.  
This DVD Video Camera uses 8 cm DVD-RAM discs  
and 8 cm DVD-R discs for camcorder use.  
Discs removed from Round DVD Holder cannot be used  
on this DVD Video Camera: Use them only in the holder.  
Donotinsertabarediscremovedfromtheholderintothe  
DVD Video Camera: It will not be removable.  
Note:  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic discs, since  
their compatibility with this DVD Video Camera has been  
confirmed. Using a disc other than those made by  
Panasonic may not allow the DVD Video Camera to  
deliver optimum performance.  
It is necessary to initialize an unformatted DVD-RAM  
disc. When an unformatted disc is inserted into the DVD  
Video Camera, a message will appear: Initialize the disc  
following the instructions on screen (P. 125).  
28  
Information on DVD-R Disc  
You cannot record a still on DVD-R disc, or delete any  
recorded images or data.  
lFinalizing DVD-R disc  
Before using the 8 cm DVD-R disc on a DVD player or  
DVD video recorder that is compatible with 8 cm DVD-  
R disc, the disc must be finalized on this DVD Video  
Camera. For the finalizing procedure of 8 cm DVD-R  
disc, refer to “Finalizing DVD-R Disc (Finalize Disc)”  
(P. 127).  
ForoptimumrecordingonDVD-Rdisc,thisDVDVideo  
Camera writes control data to the disc in order to  
automatically make adjustments when it is inserted and  
ejected accompanying recording. If the disc has no area  
to be written for adjustment, recording may not be  
possible. To prevent this, do not insert or eject a DVD-R  
discwhichhasbeenrecordedonmorethan50times.The  
DVDVideoCamerawillnotperformwriteadjustment”  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned on again, from  
off,forrecordingwiththediscinit,orwhennorecording  
is made, even if the disc is removed and then reinserted.  
Note:  
When using an unformatted DVD-R disc, it is necessary  
to format it on this DVD Video Camera (See page 47).  
Do not insert a DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD Video  
Camera but not finalized, into a recordable device, such  
as a DVD video recorder: The recorded data may be  
damaged.  
DVD-R discs edited and finalized on PC or those finalized  
on another DVD video recorder may not be playable on  
this DVD Video Camera, depending on the editing  
software used or recording status of DVD-R disc.  
Refer to the remaining time indicated on the LCD of DVD  
Video Camera to check the capacity of DVD-R disc.  
Examples of Discs that Cannot be Used on this DVD Video Camera  
DVD-RAM (2.6 GB) Ver. 1.0  
DVD-ROM MO  
DVD-R (3.9 GB) Ver. 1.0  
DVD-Video MD  
DVD-R (4.7 GB) for Authoring Ver. 2.0 CD-R  
iD  
DVD-RW  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
CD-RW  
CD  
LD  
Floppy disk  
Discs other than those with diameter of 8 cm  
CD-ROM  
Note:  
Discs recorded on PC or DVD video recorder may not be playable on this DVD Video Camera: If so, message “This disc  
cannotbeused.willappear.Also,bluethumbnailswillappear(Fig.1*onpage 30),ornormalplaybackwillnotbepossible.  
29  
Handling Discs  
lUsing discs  
lStoring discs  
DVD-RAM and DVD-R discs are very delicate When storing disc, insert it in Round DVD Holder into  
recording media. Carefully read the following cautions  
plastic case.  
and observe them:  
Be careful that no condensation occurs on disc.  
When using a disc in this DVD Video Camera, be sure Do not place disc in the following places:  
to keep it in Round DVD Holder.  
Always use a brand new disc when recording  
important material.  
Direct sunlight for a long time  
Where humidity is high or in dusty place  
While there is heat from a heater, etc.  
Be sure not to touch the exposed  
disc portion, and be careful that  
no dirt adheres to it.  
If there is dust, scratch, dirt on  
disc or if it is warped, the  
Note:  
See page 74 when cleaning the removed disc.  
See page 73 for how to handle disc removed from Round  
DVD Holder.  
See page 74 for how to set the disc removed from  
Round DVD Holder oranother disc correctly into Round  
DVD Holder.  
Do not touch  
following phenomena may occur:  
Block noise in playback image  
Momentary stop of playback  
image  
Sound interrupted during  
playback, or abnormal sound  
Block noise  
Blue thumbnail display*  
(Fig. 1)  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
001/ 006  
Disc cannot correctly be  
recognized  
Delay between video and  
audio  
PLAY  
RAM  
Even if disc is normal, the  
above phenomena may  
(Fig. 1)  
*
occasionally occur. While the ACCESS/PC indicator  
is lit, do not subject disc to vibrations or impact, and  
avoid using DVD Video Camera at extremely high or  
low temperatures, or in an environment where  
condensation is likely to occur.  
When recording images, the  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
001 / 002  
DVD Video Camera may  
avoid the portions of disc  
where recording is not  
possible, due to dust,  
scratches, etc. [It will pause  
m at such a portion and  
PLAY  
RAM  
(Recording one scene  
may produce multiple  
thumbnails.)  
automatically  
restart  
recording (n).]  
This will cause recording to  
be interrupted for several seconds to several minutes,  
and multiple thumbnails will be created by one  
recording session as shown above. In this case, the  
recordable time on disc will decrease.  
Be careful when removing the disc since the metal of  
removal slot of DVD Video Camera, and disc itself,  
may be hot.  
30  
Available Cards  
lCommon cautions for disc and card  
It is recommended that you create a backup file for  
valuable data on hard disk of PC.  
Do not do the following, or the data on card may be  
damaged or lost:  
Do not remove the card or turn DVD Video Camera  
off during reading or writing of data  
SD Memory  
Card and  
MultiMediaCard  
can be used in  
this DVD Video  
Camera.  
Do not use DVD Video Camera in a place subject to  
static electricity or electrical noise  
lHandling card  
Do not use cards other than the  
designated ones.  
Donottouchthecardterminalor  
allow it to touch metal.  
Donotpaste anythingotherthan  
exclusive label on label pasting  
portion.  
Do not subject card to impact,  
bend card or drop it.  
Do not disassemble card or modify it.  
Do not expose card to water.  
Do not use or store card in the following places:  
Where the temperature is high, such as in vehicle at  
hightemperatures, indirectsunlightornearaheater.  
Where humidity is high, or in dusty place  
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of Children to  
prevent swallowing.  
When the write-protect switch on SD Memory Card is  
locked, no recording, deletion or editing will be  
possible on the card.  
Note:  
The reading/writing speed of MultiMediaCard is slower  
than SD Memory Card. When MultiMediaCard is used,  
the performance of certain features may be slightly  
slower than advertised.  
We recommend that you use a Panasonic brand SD  
Memory Card.  
This DVD Video Camera can play back image data  
recorded on other digitalcameras conforming to the DCF  
(DesignruleforCameraFilesystem)standardwhichwas  
established by the Japan Electronics and Information  
Technology Industries Association (JEITA). The range of  
image data playable on this DVD Video Camera is that  
with pixels from 80 horizontal × 60 vertical to 4000  
horizontal × 3000 vertical.  
DCFisanintegratedimagefileformatfordigitalcameras:  
Image files can be used on all digital devices conforming  
to DCF.  
Image data edited on PC and certain types of image data  
may not be viewable on this DVD Video Camera.  
The image data recorded on another device may not be  
playable on this DVD Video Camera.  
Terminal  
Write-protect switch  
Locked status  
31  
Storage Capacity of Disc or Card  
Recordable Time of Movie (Video)  
The recordable time will vary depending on the recording quality: See page 86 for the setting of recording quality.  
Movie recordable time on one disc (on single side) (when recording only movies)  
Disc used  
Recording quality  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
*1  
Image quality prioritized  
Recording time prioritized  
XTRA  
FINE  
STD  
Approx. 18 min  
No recording possible  
*2  
*2  
Approx. 30 min  
Approx. 30 min  
*3  
*3  
Approx. 60 min  
Approx. 60 min  
*4  
LPCM  
No recording possible Approx. 30 min  
*1:Variablebitrecording(recordingofmorethan18minutesmaybepossiblebecausethetransferratevariesautomatically  
between approx. 3-10 Mbps)  
*2:Transfer rate: Approx. 6 Mbps  
*3:Transfer rate: Approx. 3 Mbps  
*4:Linear PCM recording (see “Terminology”, P. 148) (If your DVD player does not conform to MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2,  
record in LPCM mode)  
Note:  
Audio in XTRA, FINE or STD mode is recorded in the  
MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2 format, which is the option  
standard of DVD video standard.  
No movie can be recorded on SD Memory Card or  
MultiMediaCard.  
When using DVD-R disc, you cannot switch the movie  
quality while recording on the disc: The DVD Video  
Camera will be automatically set to the movie quality first  
used with the disc for recording.  
32  
Recordable Stills (Photos) on Disc  
Note:  
Cards used on other devices can be used on this DVD  
Video Camera.  
No movie or music data recorded on card can be  
checked, viewed or heard on this DVD Video Camera. In  
addition, no such data file can be displayed on this DVD  
Video Camera.  
Use the remaining capacity function to check the  
remaining free space on disc before use. See “Verifying  
Remaining Free Space on Disc or Card (Capacity)” on  
page 124.  
lNumber of recordable stills on one  
side of disc: Up to 999  
Ifthe disc still has free space after recording 999 stills on  
it, movies can also be recorded on it.  
Recordable Stills (Photos) on Card  
Some stilldata recorded on this DVD Video Camera may  
not be playable on another device.  
The number of recordable stills will vary depending on  
the recording quality: see page 87 for the setting of  
recording quality.  
Size and Quality of Photos  
For VDR-M50PP  
The pixel size of JPEG stills that can be recorded on this  
DVD Video Camera is as follows:  
Recording quality  
Capacity  
FINE  
NORM  
Approx. 95  
Approx. 200  
Approx. 440  
Approx. 880  
ECO  
8 MB  
Approx. 45  
Approx. 100  
Approx. 220  
Approx. 440  
Approx. 190  
Approx. 400  
Approx. 880  
Approx. 1,760  
Setting  
Model  
16 MB  
32 MB  
64 MB  
Camera input External input  
VDR-M50PP 640 × 480 pixels 640 × 480 pixels  
VDR-M70PP 1,280 × 960 pixels 640 × 480 pixels  
128MB Approx. 880  
Approx. 1,760 Approx. 3,520  
Thefollowingtableshowsthefilesizeandqualityofone  
JPEG still recorded on card:  
256 MB Approx. 1,760 Approx. 3,520 Approx. 7,040  
512 MB Approx. 3,520 Approx. 7,040 Approx. 14,080  
File size  
For VDR-M70PP  
Quality  
Application  
VDR-  
M50PP  
VDR-  
M70PP  
Recording quality  
Capacity  
FINE  
NORM  
Approx. 14  
Approx. 35  
Approx. 80  
Approx. 160  
Approx. 320  
Approx. 640  
ECO  
FINE  
Approx.  
128 KB  
Approx. When image  
512 KB quality is  
prioritized  
8 MB  
Approx. 8  
Approx. 20  
Approx. 50  
Approx. 110  
Approx. 220  
Approx. 440  
Approx. 880  
16 MB  
32 MB  
64 MB  
Approx. 22  
Approx. 50  
Approx. 100  
NORM  
ECO  
Approx.  
64 KB  
Approx. Standard  
384 KB  
Approx.  
32 KB  
Approx. When number of  
256 KB stills is prioritized  
(quality will be  
128MB Approx. 200  
256 MB Approx. 400  
512 MB Approx. 800  
slightly inferior)  
Although still images are recorded on DVD-RAM disc  
only inthe FINEmode, the quality mode can be changed  
when recording stills on card.  
Approx. 1,280 Approx. 1,760  
(The numbers of recordable stills above are only for  
reference)  
* See page 165 for the number of recordable stills.  
Note:  
No still can be recorded on DVD-R disc.  
33  
Setups  
Thissectionexplainspreparationsforrecording-settinguptheDVDVideoCameraandbatterypack.  
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera  
Holding DVD Video Camera  
Using Grip Belt  
Insert your right hand from the bottom of DVD Video  
Camera up to the base of your thumb.  
Put your hand in a position where you can easily operate  
the REC button and the Zoom lever.  
Adjust the length of grip belt so that the DVD Video  
Camera is stable when you press the REC button with  
your thumb.  
1) Detach the belt.  
2) Ajust the length of grip belt.  
3) Attach the belt.  
Note:  
Do not adjust the grip belt while holding the DVD Video Camera: Doing this could cause the DVD Video Camera to fall  
and be damaged.  
To use as a Hand Strap  
Using the Grip Belt as a hand strap makes it easier to carry the DVD Video Camera.  
1
Detach the Grip Belt from the Video Camera.  
1) Open the Lock cover.  
2) Push the Lock button and pull the grip belt from  
the DVD Video Camera.  
Support the DVD Video Camera securely by the  
hand to avoid falling.  
Lock cover  
Lock button  
Lock cover  
Open the lock cover while pinching the protection  
portion of both ends.  
Return the lock cover to the closed position  
after pulling out the grip belt.  
2
Make it a hand strap.  
1) Turn over the belt.  
2) Pull the tip in the derection of the  
arrow.  
3) Attach the belt.  
34  
To use as a Grip Belt again  
1
Attach the tip of the grip belt to the DVD Video  
Camera (1).  
Pressdownthelockcoverinthedirectionofthearrow  
so that the belt will not fall out (2).  
Lock cover  
Attaching Shoulder Belt  
Be sure to pass through the 2 slots.  
Pass the Shoulder belt through  
the Shoulder belt attachments.  
Attaching Lens Cap  
Pass the provided string through the hole in the Grip Belt Attachment part and pass it through the hole in the lens cap.  
1
2
Attach the lens cap string to lens cap.  
Shorter side is for the lens cap.  
3
Push both sides of cap inward and attach it over the  
lens.  
Attach the string to the attachment hole of DVD  
Video Camera.  
Detaching the grip belt makes things easier.  
Push and fit  
Note:  
Always keep the lens cap on when not using the DVD  
Video Camera, to protect the lens.  
When recording, attach the lens cap to the grip belt by  
hooking the tab inside the cap onto strap for comfortable  
shooting.  
When using as a hand strap, you cannot attach the lens  
cap to it.  
35  
Inserting Battery into Remote Controller  
Insert the provided button type battery into remote controller.  
1
2
Slide the cover to remove it.  
3
Slide the cover to close it.  
Insert the button type battery with the positive R  
terminal facing up.  
Note:  
Thelifeofthebuttontypebatteryisapproximatelyoneyear.  
If the battery is discharged, no operation is possible with  
remote controller: Replace the battery.  
Battery stopper  
Removing Battery from Remote Controller  
1
While pushing the battery stopper, slide the battery  
out.  
While pushing  
battery stopper  
Battery stopper  
Warning:  
Note:  
KEEP THE BATTERY AWAY FROM CHILDREN AND  
PETS.  
Dispose of battery safely in accordance with local laws.  
Do not dispose of in fire.  
IF SWALLOWED CONSULT A PHYSICIAN  
IMMEDIATELY FOR EMERGENCY TREATMENT.  
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF NOT HANDLED  
PROPERLY.DONOTRECHARGE,DISASSEMBLEOR  
DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.  
Do not short circuit the battery.  
Do not hold the battery with metallic tweezers.  
Keep the battery in a dark, cool, dry place.  
Warning:  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.  
Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s  
instructions. Risk of fire, explosion and burns. Do not  
recharge, disassemble, heat above 212°F (100°C) or  
inclnerate, Keep the Button-Type battery out of the  
reach of children. Never put Button-Type battery in  
mouth. If swallowed, call your doctor.  
36  
lUsing Remote Controller  
Note:  
When using the remote controller, make sure that the  
infrared receiver on DVD VideoCamera is not exposed to  
direct sunlight or any intense light. If the infrared receiver  
is subject to light stronger than the infrared light from  
remote controller, the DVD Video Camera cannot be  
operated by remote controller.  
To operate the DVD Video Camera with the remote  
controller, point it at the infrared receiver before pressing  
buttons. If it does not work properly, do not forget to point  
it at the receiver to repeat the action. The remote  
controllable distance is up to 16 feet (5 m).  
If there is an obstacle between the remote control and  
infrared receiver on DVD Video Camera, remote control  
may not be possible.  
Depending on the type of fluorescent lamp in the room,  
the remote controller may not work properly.  
10  
10  
15  
Infrared  
receiver  
15  
Viewing Subject Through Viewfinder  
1
2
Pull out the viewfinder.  
Caution:  
Turn the diopter control knob to adjust the focus to  
suit your eyesight.  
Do not lift the DVD Video Camera by holding the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor: If the viewfinder or LCD  
monitor comes off, the DVD Video Camera will fall.  
Diopter control  
Pull out the  
viewfinder.  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0 4  
S E P 3 0  
2
Note:  
If no image appears in viewfinder, refer to “Check 6” on  
page 151.  
If the LCD monitor is open approximately 90°, the  
viewfinder will be off.  
Focusing will not be correct unless the viewfinder is  
pulled out.  
37  
Viewing Image on LCD Monitor Screen  
If you open the LCD monitor, you can monitor subject image on the LCD screen.  
1
Open the LCD monitor.  
TheLCDmonitorhasaspotwhereyoucanhookyour  
finger. Hook the finger there to open the monitor.  
90°  
Hook your finger  
(Bottom)  
lRange of LCD monitor movement  
The LCD monitor can be opened up to approximately  
90º.  
90  
If the LCD monitor is open 90°, the screen can be tilted  
down by as much as 90°, and can also be tilted up and  
turnedupto180°sothescreenfacesinthesamedirection  
as the lens.  
180  
If the LCD monitor is turned 180° so the screen faces in  
the same direction as the lens during recording, subject  
image will also appear in the viewfinder as a mirror  
image (left/right reversed).  
Tilt the LCD monitor to adjust its vertical angle so that  
you can easily see the screen .  
Note:  
If no image appears on LCD monitor screen, refer to  
“Check 7” on page 151.  
Be sure to open the LCD monitor approximately 90º  
before changing its vertical angle.  
Do not record for a prolonged time with the LCD monitor  
turned approximately 180º in close contact with the DVD  
Video Camera body: Doing this could cause the DVD  
Video Camera and LCD monitor to become hot.  
38  
Closing LCD Monitor  
Before closing the LCD monitor, be sure to reset it at a  
right angle to the DVD Video Camera.  
Close the LCD monitor, with the LCD screen facing  
inward, until a click is heard.  
Note:  
Be sure to return the LCD monitor to a right angles to the  
DVD Video Camera before closing it. If the LCD monitor  
is tilted or faces outward from the camera body, it cannot  
be closed to the DVD Video Camera.  
IftheLCDmonitorisnotsecurelylockedtotheDVDVideo  
Camera, no image will appear in the viewfinder.  
Caution:  
Do not lift the DVD Video Camera by holding the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor: If the viewfinder or LCD  
monitor comes off, the DVD Video Camera will fall.  
39  
Setting Date and Time  
Set the current date and time so that the date and time at which you make a recording can be recorded  
correctly.  
The following procedure can also be used to correct the date and time you have already set.  
MENU  
Tilt up/down and left/right  
to select, and then press  
A to designate.  
1
2
Turn the DVD Video Camera on.  
5
Tilt the joystick to the left or  
the right to select the digit  
you want to set in sequence.  
Da t e Se u p  
t
Press the MENU button.  
Da t e Mode  
Da t e Se  
Ca  
m
e r a F u nc  
t
i
on s Se t u p  
t
SEP 3 0 2004  
8 : 00AM  
P r og r a  
m
AE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
A u t o  
A u t o  
Wh i t e Ba l .  
The menu screen will  
appear.  
Tilt the joystick up or down  
to select the number for  
current date/time, and then  
E
I
S
On  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
D i g .  
Z
o om  
4 0 x  
W i n d C u t  
Wi  
ENTER  
O
4
f
f
d
e
:
3
RETURN  
RAM  
repeat step 5 to set the current date and time.  
Note:  
3
4
Use the joystick to choose  
“DateSetupandthenDate  
Set”.  
To stop date/time setting midway, press the C button.  
Da t e Se u p  
t
6
7
After setting thecurrentdate  
and time, press the A  
button.  
Da t e Mode  
Da t e Se  
Da t e Se  
t
t
JAN  
1
2004  
12: 00AM  
SEP 30 2004 8 : 00A  
M
Da t e se t up?  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
YES  
NO  
The screen for verifying the  
set date will appear.  
Tilt the joystick to the right.  
ENTER  
RAM  
Da t e Se u p  
t
Thefigureforthemonthwill  
be selected.  
[The digit that is highlighted  
first depends on the date  
display format (set up in  
Da t e Mode  
Da t e Se  
If the displayed date and time are correct, use the  
joystick to choose “YES”, and then press the  
A button.  
t
JAN  
1
2004  
12: 00AM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
The date and time will be set, and the DVD Video  
Camera will enter recording pause mode.  
Choosing “NO” will restore the menu screen.  
Date Mode): The digit on the left end of the date  
display will be highlighted first.]  
Note:  
After setting the figure for the month, tilt the joystick to  
the right to select the digit to be set. If you press the  
A button after selecting the figure for the month, the  
screen for verifying the set date will appear instead of  
the screen for setting day, year or time.  
Important Note:  
This DVD Video Camera incorporates a rechargeable  
battery to store the date and time in memory. If this  
built-in battery is exhausted, the date and time will be  
reset. To prevent this, connect the AC adaptor to DVD  
Video Camera every 3 months, and leave it to charge  
foratleast24hourswiththeDVDVideoCameraturned  
off: The built-in battery will be charged.  
40  
Changing Display Format of Date and Time  
You can select one of three date display formats: month/day/year, day/month/year, or year/month/day. The time  
display format will also change as follows:  
Display format  
Example of display  
5:00PM  
SEP 30 2004  
M/D/Y  
17:00  
D/M/Y  
Y/M/D  
30. 9.2004  
17:00  
2004. 9.30  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
3
4
Use the joystick to select the  
Da t e Se u p  
t
desired date display format,  
and then press the  
A button.  
The menu screen will appear.  
Da t e Mode  
Da t e Se  
D/M/  
Y
t
Use the joystick to choose  
“Date Mode” on the “Date  
Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Da t e Se u p  
t
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Da t e Mode  
Da t e Se  
M/D/  
D/M/  
Y
Y
t
The menu screen for settingdate will be restored, and  
the “Date Mode” will have been changed as you  
designated.  
Y / M/ D  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
The options will appear to  
the rightof “Date Mode”:TheZmarkwillbeattached  
to the currently selected option.  
Press the MENU button to switch off the menu  
screen.  
Note:  
If the date display format has been changed, the display  
formatduringplayback as well as duringrecording will also  
be changed (See page 54).  
41  
About the Battery Pack  
Attaching Battery Pack to DVD Video Camera  
1
Fitthebatterypacktothebatteryattachmentplatform  
on this DVD Video Camera and slide it upward until  
a click is heard.  
Note:  
Make sure that the battery pack is in the correct  
orientation.  
Make sure that the battery pack is securely attached:  
Incomplete attachment could cause the battery pack to  
fall, resulting in damage.  
Terminal  
must  
face up.  
Removing Battery Pack  
After using the DVD Video Camera, remove the battery pack from it.  
1
2
Slide the BATTERY EJECT switch on the bottom of  
DVD Video Camera: The battery pack can be  
removed.  
Note:  
For safety, be sure to turn the DVD Video Camera off  
before attaching or removing the battery pack.  
Be careful not to drop the removed battery pack.  
If the battery remains attached, minute level current will  
flow even if the DVD Video Camera is off, and the battery  
pack will discharge.  
Slide the battery pack downward to remove it.  
1
2
42  
Continuous Recording (without zoom):  
lRecordable time with fully charged  
battery pack (with no zoom  
operation, etc.)  
Foryourreference,theapproximateDVDVideoCamera  
recordable time with fully charged battery pack [with  
model CGA-DU14A]:  
ThecontinuousrecordingtimeofDVDVideoCamerain  
thelefttableshowstheavailablerecordingtimewhenthe  
DVD Video Camera is in the recording mode without  
using any other function after recording is started. In  
actual recording, the battery pack will discharge 2-3  
times fasterthanthisreference since the REC buttonand  
zoom are being operated, and playback is performed.  
Assume that the recordable time with a fully charged  
battery pack is between 40 and 60 minutes [with model  
CGA-DU14A], and prepare the type and number of  
batteries to allow for the time you are planning to record  
on the DVD Video Camera.  
VDR-M50PP  
Video  
quality  
DVD-RAM disc DVD-R disc  
mode  
XTRA*1  
FINE  
When using approx. 140 min  
viewfinder  
Note that the battery pack discharges faster in cold  
places.  
When using approx. 120 min  
LCD monitor  
When using approx. 140 min approx. 135 min  
viewfinder  
lThe time taken for charging the  
battery pack is as follows  
[at 77ºF (25 ºC)]  
When using approx. 120 min approx. 115 min  
LCD monitor  
STD  
When using approx. 165 min approx. 160 min  
viewfinder  
CGA-DU14A  
165 min  
When using approx. 135 min approx. 130 min  
LCD monitor  
LPCM*2  
When using  
viewfinder  
approx. 135 min  
Note:  
When using  
LCD monitor  
approx. 115 min  
See page 158 when charging is not possible.  
The charge time will vary depending on the remaining  
battery level.  
During and after charging, the battery pack will be warm,  
but this does not indicate a fault.  
VDR-M70PP  
Video  
quality  
mode  
XTRA*1  
If the following phenomena appear, the battery pack  
may be dead: Replace it.  
- Charging does not start within 10 seconds (the  
CHARGE indicator does not light).  
- The battery pack cannot be charged up to 75% if more  
than 9 hours have elapsed after charging started.  
- The battery pack cannot be fully charged if more than  
5 hours have elapsed after it was charged to 75%.  
Charge the battery pack at ambient temperature 50°F to  
86°F (10°C to 30°C): Charging at temperatures other  
than this range could damage the battery pack.  
DVD-RAM disc DVD-R disc  
When using approx. 130 min  
viewfinder  
When using approx. 110 min  
LCD monitor  
FINE  
When using approx. 130 min approx. 125 min  
viewfinder  
When using approx. 110 min approx. 105 min  
LCD monitor  
STD  
When using approx. 150 min approx. 145 min  
viewfinder  
When using approx. 125 min approx. 120 min  
LCD monitor  
LPCM*2  
When using  
viewfinder  
approx. 125 min  
When using  
LCD monitor  
approx. 105 min  
*1 The time in XTRA mode is only for reference: It varies  
depending on recording contents.  
*2 LPCM mode can be set only when DVD-R disc is used.  
43  
Remaining Battery Level Indicator  
When the battery pack isusedto power the DVD Video Camera, the battery remaining level appearsin theviewfinder  
or on the LCD screen as follows:  
Fully charged  
Nearly empty  
(Blinks)  
Shows remaining level  
Note:  
If you use the optional CGA-DU07A battery pack at low temperatures, “  
time may be shorter.  
” may not appear, and the battery usable  
” may be displayed for an extended  
If you use the provided CGA-DU14A battery pack, the remaining level indicator “  
period, and “  
” or “  
” may be displayed for a shorter period.  
Efficient Use of Battery Pack  
Charge battery pack immediately before using Store in cool place:  
DVD Video Camera:  
WhenyouarenotusingtheDVDVideoCamera,remove  
the battery pack and store it in a cool place. If you store  
itinaplacewherethetemperatureishigh,thebatterylife  
will be shortened. Be especially sure not to store the  
batterypackinanenvironment (inaclosedvehicle)over  
140°F (60°C): Neglecting this could damage the battery  
pack.  
The battery pack will slightly discharge even if it is  
detached from the DVD Video Camera. If the battery  
pack is left attached to DVD Video Camera, it will  
consume a slight amount of power.  
Important Note:  
Therefore, it is recommended that you charge the  
battery pack shortly before using the DVD Video  
Camera, usually on the day before you plan to use it.  
Since the battery pack used for this DVD Video Camera  
Battery life:  
Battery life varies greatly depending on the ambient  
environment and how often the DVD Video Camera is  
used. If the usable time of DVD Video Camera with a  
fullychargedbatterypackisnoticeablyshort,thebattery  
pack is probably dead: Purchase a new one.  
is free from the memory effect, you do not need to  
completelydischargethebatterypackbeforechargingit.  
When not using the DVD Video Camera for an  
extended period:  
It is recommended that you fully charge the battery pack  
onceayear,attachittoDVDVideoCameraanduseitup;  
then remove the battery pack and store it in a cool place  
again.  
Power save and discharge of battery pack:  
It is recommended that you turn the DVD Video Camera  
off in status other than recording, since even during  
recording pause battery power is consumed at the same  
level as during recording.  
If,whenyouspecifyPowerSaveOn,therecordingpause  
status continues for approximately 5 minutes, the DVD  
Video Camera will automatically turn off.  
To set or release power save, see “Turning DVD Video  
Camera Off Automatically (Power Save)” on page 92.  
44  
Using DVD Video Camera with AC adaptor  
It is recommended that you use the AC adaptor to power the DVD Video Camera from a household AC outlet when  
you perform settings on it, play back or edit images, or use it indoors.  
Note:  
Be sure to use the specified AC adaptor to power the DVD Video Camera. Using other AC adaptors could cause electric  
shock or result in fire.  
Power cable  
DC cord  
AC adaptor  
1
2
3
Connect the power cable to AC adaptor.  
Note:  
The AC adaptor can be used around the world. An AC plug  
adaptor is required in some foreign countries. If you need  
one, purchase it from your distributor.  
Plug the power cable into household AC outlet.  
Plug one end of DC cord into the DC output jack on  
AC adaptor.  
AC 200-240V  
4
Attach the other end of DC cord to the battery  
attachment platform on DVD Video Camera.  
AC Plug Adaptor (not supplied)  
45  
Inserting and Removing Disc  
Inserting Disc  
1
Press down the DISC EJECT lever once and release  
it.  
Correct  
orientation  
A few moments after the ACCESS/PC indicator  
blinks, the cover of disc insertion compartment will  
open slightly.  
Incorrect orientation  
2
3
Gently open the cover by hand until it stops.  
Insert the disc, in Round DVD Holder, into the disc  
guide until it stops.  
Notethattherecording/playbacksurfaceofdiscmust  
face the inside of DVD Video Camera. The  
orientation for inserting the disc into the disc guide is  
also specific: load the disc correctly, referring to the  
figure below.  
4
5
Push the section marked “PUSH CLOSE” on the  
cover of disc insertion compartment, to close the  
cover.  
Turn the DVD Video Camera on (  
or  
).  
PUSH CLOSE  
portion  
When “DISC ACCESS” disappears, the DVD Video  
Camera is ready for recording.  
Disc cover  
lIdentifying recording/playback  
sides of disc:  
DISC EJECT  
Disc guide  
lever  
Single sided disc:  
“SIDE A” mark  
The recording/playback side is  
opposite to the printed label.  
Double-sided disc:  
The disc exposed portion must face in the same  
direction as the lens, as shown in figure.  
The recording/playback side must face the inside of  
DVD Video Camera.  
The recording/playback side of  
“SIDE A” is opposite to the  
“SIDE A” marked side.  
The recording/playback side of  
“SIDE B” is the “SIDE A”  
marked side.  
The opposite side is  
the “SIDE A”  
recording/playback  
side.  
46  
Note:  
lWhen using brand-new DVD-R disc  
Disc cannot be inserted or removed unless the battery  
pack or AC adaptor is connected to DVD Video Camera.  
See page 74 for how to set disc in Round DVD Holder.  
If there is some delay before recording starts, refer to  
“Check 4” on page 150.  
Recognition of the disc will  
F o rma t D i s c  
start.  
T h i s d i s c m u s t b e f o r m a t t e d  
b e f o r e i t c a n b e u s e d b y  
t h i s c a m e r a .  
The messages on the right will  
appear in sequence by pressing  
the A button between  
messages.  
The disc insertion orientation is specific: Forcibly  
inserting a disc in wrong orientation could damage the  
DVD Video Camera or Round DVD Holder of disc.  
Ifthediscisnotcorrectlyinserted,thecoverwillnotclose.  
Never try to forcibly close the cover: This could cause  
damage. Reinsert the disc properly.  
If a single-sided disc is inserted into DVD Video Camera  
with the printed label facing the inside, an error message  
will appear. Remove the disc and reinsert it with its  
recording/playback side facing the inside. See “Error  
Messages” on page 152.  
NEXT  
CANCEL  
Whenrecordingonthis  
DVD Video Camera:  
When the first message  
F o rma t D i s c  
“Format the disc now?”  
appears, choose “YES” and  
then press the A button. The  
disc will be automatically  
formatted.  
D o n o t f o r m a t t h i s d i s c  
i f y o u w a n t t o r e c o r d f r o m  
t h e PC connec t i on t e r m i n a l .  
NEXT  
CANCEL  
When using double-sided disc  
Recordingispossibleonbothsidesofdouble-sided disc.  
However, when recording or playback on one side is  
finished, recording or playback will not move  
automatically to the other side. Remove the disc once  
from the DVD Video Camera, turn over the disc in Round  
DVD Holder and insert it again for continued use.  
When formatting is complete,  
“DVD-R disc, Video mode  
cannot be changed” will appear  
(See page 155): Press the A  
button to erase the message.  
Once formatted, a DVD-R disc  
cannolongerberecordedonby  
a PC, even if it has not been  
recordedonbythisDVD Video  
Camera.  
F o r  
m
a t D i s c  
F o r m a t t h e d i s c n o w ?  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
Note:  
See page 86 for movie quality mode.  
When recording data from PC:  
While the above messagesare being displayed, press the  
g button, or when message “Format the disc now?”  
appears, choose “NO” and then press the A button.  
IfdatafromPChasnotyetbeenrecorded, thedisccanbe  
madeusableonthisDVDVideoCamera.Wheninserting  
the disc into this DVD Video Camera, the same message  
will appear: If you wish to use it on this DVD Video  
Camera, choose “YES”.  
Note:  
Do not initialize a disc on which you wish to record data  
created using the application MyDVD on PC.  
47  
Removing Disc  
1
Set the power switch to “OFF”  
toturntheDVDVideoCamera  
off.  
Note:  
Even after the DVD Video Camera is turned on, the disc  
can be removed unless it is in recording status. Hold  
down the DISC EJECT lever for approximately  
2
seconds, and then release it to remove the disc. (The  
DISC EJECT indicator on the LCD screen will blink.) It is  
recommended that you turn the DVD Video Camera off  
before inserting or removing disc to prevent  
misoperation.  
Do not remove the battery pack or disconnect the AC  
adaptor during removal of the disc or until power is  
completely turned off: If you do, the disc cover will not  
open. If this happens, reattach the battery pack or AC  
adaptor, push down the DISC EJECT lever once, and  
then release it.  
Do not insert anything other than the 8 cm DVD-RAM or  
DVD-R disc into the disc insertion block: Doing so could  
cause malfunctions.  
2
Press down the DISC EJECT  
lever once and release it.  
In a moment, the cover of disc  
insertion compartment will  
open slightly.  
Set the power switch to “OFF” to turn the DVD Video  
Camera off.  
DISC EJECT  
When inserting or removing the disc, be careful not to  
touch the inside of DVD Video Camera [especially, the  
lens of laser pickup (see “Terminology” on page 148 )].  
When inserting or removing the disc, connect a charged  
battery pack or AC adaptor to the DVD Video Camera:  
The disc cover will not open unless the DVD Video  
Camera is powered.  
3
4
Gently open the cover until it  
stops.  
When the cover is fully open,  
the disc will slightly come out  
from the disc guide, and stop.  
Remove the disc.  
Hold the top of Round  
DVDHolderasshownin  
the illustration and  
gently pull it out.  
Note:  
Becarefulnottotouchthe  
exposed disc portion  
when removing the disc.  
Whengraspingtheholder,  
avoid the exposed disc  
portion.  
5
Gently push the section  
indicated “PUSH CLOSE”  
on the cover of disc insertion  
compartment (on side) to  
close the cover.  
48  
Inserting and Removing Card  
1
2
Turn the DVD Video Camera off.  
Note:  
Do not push the label pasting  
portion of SD Memory Card when  
removing it: Doing so could  
damage the SD Memory Card.  
When you close the cover, be sure  
not to insert the grip belt into the  
insertion slot. If you insert the grip  
belt into the insertion slot, the  
insertion slot will be damaged.  
Open the cover of card  
insertion slot.  
3
Insert card with its contacts  
inward until it locks.  
Label pasting  
portion  
Removing Card  
Push the center of card edge:  
The card will come out so that  
it can be held by fingers.  
4
Close the cover of card  
insertion slot.  
49  
Basic Techniques  
This section explains the basic techniques of recording movies and still images, and also basic settings  
on DVD Video Camera.  
Basic Operation of DVD Video Camera  
Turning DVD Video Camera On or Off  
While holding down the button at the center of power  
switch, set the switch according to each recording  
function:  
Note:  
Once you turn the DVD Video Camera on to let it  
recognize the disc, you can immediately record or play  
back the same disc when the DVD Video Camera is  
turnedonagain (DVD-RAM). However, ifyouremovethe  
disc, replace it, or if the date changes after power is  
turned on, it will take some time for the DVD Video  
Camera tostartbecauseitmustrecognize thedisc again  
(See page 150).  
Set to “ ”:  
Torecord stillonSDMemory  
Card or MultiMediaCard  
Once you have turned the DVD Video Camera on to  
record,youcanimmediatelystartrecordingwhenturning  
the DVD Video Camera on next time (DVD-R disc).  
ItwilltakesometimefortheDVDVideoCameratodisplay  
the Disc navigation screen after power is turned on.  
When you turn the DVD Video Camera on, the ACCESS  
indicator will light or blink to show that the DVD Video  
Camera is recognizing the disc or card: During this time,  
no operation, such as recording, can be performed.  
Afterseveralseconds,theACCESSindicatorwillgoout,  
and operating the DVD Video Camera will be possible.  
If the ACCESS indicator does not go out, refer to “Check  
4” on page 150.  
Set to “OFF”:  
The DVD Video Camera will  
turn off.  
Set to “  
”:  
To record movie on DVD-  
RAM or DVD-R disc  
Set to “  
”:  
To record still on DVD-RAM  
disc.  
CARD ACCESS  
indicator  
Power ON status  
During playback, set the power switch to “  
” or  
” when using disc, or set it to “ ” when using  
card.  
ACCESS/PC  
indicator  
Turn the switch while holding down the button at the  
center of switch.  
When the DVD Video Camera is turned on, the self-  
diagnosisfunctionoperatesandamessagemayappear.  
In this case, refer to “Error Messages” on page 152 and  
take corrective action.  
While the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit  
or blinking, do not cause impact or vibration to the DVD  
Video Camera.  
Power switch  
50  
12  
Recording Movie  
Inserta recordableDVD-RAMorDVD-Rdisc intothisDVD Video Camera.  
Before You Begin  
further recording can be made while “DISC ACCESS” is  
being displayed.  
ACCESS/PC indicator  
Recording will restart after the message disappears.  
Do not turn power off while message “DISC ACCESS” is  
being displayed.  
REC button  
Take care that power is not interrupted while the  
ACCESS/PC indicator is blinking.  
The minimum recordable time of movie is approximately  
3 seconds.  
See page 93 for setting of Record LED (recording  
indicator) On/Off.  
For various functions available during recording, see  
“Setting Up Camera Functions” on page 80.  
Panasoniccannotberesponsibleforvideoandaudiothat  
cannot be recorded or edited because of any defect.  
Thepowerswitchcanbechangedevenduringrecording,  
but the operation will not be changed.  
Pressing REC once will  
start recording;  
pressing it once again  
will temporarily stop  
recording.  
Power switch  
1
Turn the DVD Video Camera on.  
Each time the DVD Video Camera enters the recording  
pause mode, the counter display will be reset to  
“0:00:00”.  
When using DVD-R disc, do not perform the following, or  
data on the disc may not be read:  
- Using another device, doing additional recording on  
DVD-R disc first recorded on this DVD Video Camera  
- Using this DVD Video Camera, doing additional  
recording on DVD-R disc recorded on another device  
Setthepowerswitchto“  
Camera on.  
After the ACCESS/PC indicator goes out, perform  
the subsequent operations:  
toturntheDVDVideo  
2
3
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder or LCD).  
If using the viewfinder, pull it out.  
Press the REC button.  
It is recommended that you set the LOCK switch to  
(to  
” position  
the left) to prevent the power switch in the “  
from accidentally moving to “ ”.  
The “m” mark in the viewfinder or on the LCD  
screen will change to the “n” mark, and  
recording will start.  
Duringrecording,therecordingindicatoronthefront  
of the DVD Video Camera will light.  
Pressing REC again during recording will set the  
DVD Video Camera to recording pause mode.  
4
When recording is finished, turn the DVD Video  
Camera off.  
Note:  
See “Check 1” on page 150 when recording movie is not  
possible.  
See “Check 4” on page 150 if it takes some time before  
recording is possible.  
See “Check 5” on page 151 if the DVD Video Camera  
does not operate.  
See page 54 for on-screen information display.  
It is recommended that you use DVD-RAM disc from  
which recorded contents can be deleted.  
Sound is recorded from the internal stereo microphone  
on the front of DVD Video Camera: Take care that this  
microphone is not blocked.  
Youcan press theREC buttonimmediatelyafterthe DVD  
Video Camera enters recording pause mode, but no  
51  
13  
Recording Stills  
2
3
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder or LCD).  
Press the REC button.  
Note:  
RecordingofstillimagesispossibleonDVD-RAMdiscand  
card.  
CARD  
ACCESS  
indicator  
ACCESS/PC  
indicator  
The DVD Video Camera automatically focuses on  
the subject at the center of screen (when auto focus is  
selected).  
The screen will be black, and then the recorded still  
willbedisplayed. Whenthemmarkappears, you  
can proceed with the next recording; while “DISC  
ACCESS” or “CARD ACCESS” is being displayed,  
you cannot proceed with the next recording.  
REC button  
Power switch  
4
SetthepowerswitchtoOFFtoturntheDVDVideo  
Camera off.  
Turn power off only after message “DISC ACCESS”  
disappears.  
1
Turn the DVD Video Camera on.  
When using DVD-RAM disc:  
Set the power switch to “  
When using card:  
”.  
Note:  
Set the power switch to “ ”.  
See “Size and Quality of Photos” on page 33 for details  
about photos on card.  
See “Check 2” on page 150 if recording photos is not  
After the ACCESS indicator goes out, perform the  
subsequent operations:  
possible.  
Donotoperatethepowerswitchorremovethecardwhile  
the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or  
blinking: Doing so may damage the card or the data on  
card.  
With VDR-M70PP, the range of screen in which  
recording is possible will be different for movie and still.  
The DVD Video Camera automatically sets the shutter  
speed between 1/800 and 1/30 second (between 1/800  
and 1/10 second if Program AE has been set to Low  
Light) depending on subject brightness.  
52  
123  
Compensating for Backlight  
Whensubjectislitfrombehind, thisfunctionwillcompensateforlightingsothatthesubjectisnottoodark.  
1
Press the BACK LIGHT button during recording.  
REC  
0
:
0
0
:
0
9
REM  
3
0
MIN  
Backlight correction icon  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
The backlight correction icon will appear.  
Note:  
Pressing the BACK LIGHT button will alternate backlight  
setting between on and off.  
The backlight setting will automatically return to “off”  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
53  
123  
On-Screen Information  
Various types of information will appear in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen during recording.  
Information Display during Recording  
o Manual focus  
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
No display : Autofocus  
o
: (display in English or German): Manual  
focus  
REC  
L IN  
14  
15  
16  
0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
: (display in French or Italian):  
Manual focus  
: (display in Spanish): Manual focus  
1 0  
8
9
10  
REM  
3 0 MIN  
FULL AUTO  
DISC ACCESS  
3. Backlight compensation  
11  
No display : Backlight compensation OFF  
17  
18  
m
: Backlight compensation ON  
8 : 0 0 AM  
S E P 3 0 2 0 0 4  
12  
13  
FINE  
4.  
Wind Cut (only in movie recording mode)  
No display : Wind Cut OFF  
: Wind Cut ON  
Wide mode*  
No display: Wide mode 4:3  
: Wide mode 16:9  
2
The above screen is an example for explanation: It is  
different from the actual display.  
1. Recording mode  
: Movie  
*2  
External flash [when Video Flash (sold  
separately) is attached] (only in still recording mode)  
: Still with disc  
: Still with card  
A
: Emits light automatically (AUTO)  
: Always emits light  
1
*
*
*
*
: External input still with disc (field)  
: External input still with disc (frame)  
: External input still with card (field)  
: External input still with card (frame)  
1
1
1
: No light emission  
5. Self timer (only in still recording mode)  
No display : Self timer OFF  
2. e Program AE  
No display : Auto  
q10 : Self timer ON (count is from 10 seconds)  
6. External Input  
b
c
d
e
f
: Sports  
: Portrait  
: Spotlight  
: Surf & Snow  
: Low Light  
L IN  
S IN  
: AV input  
: S-VIDEO input  
*2  
7. Recording status  
n
: During recording  
j White balance  
No display : Auto  
m
No display  
: During recording pause  
*3  
h
i
j
: Set  
: Outdoor  
: Indoor  
n Electronic image stabilizer (EIS)  
No display : EIS OFF  
n
: EIS ON  
54  
8. Zoom  
13. Movie recording quality (only when using disc)  
W
XTRA  
: Image quality prioritized (only when  
(Digital Zoom: Off)  
using DVD-RAM disc)  
X
LPCM  
: Highest audio quality (only when using  
DVD-R disc)  
(Digital Zoom: 40×)  
Y
FINE  
STD  
: Standard  
: Recording time prioritized  
[Digital Zoom: 500× (VDR-M50PP),  
240× (VDR-M70PP), only in movie  
recording mode]  
9. Exposure correction  
10. FULL AUTO indicator  
11. Warning message  
12. Disc/Card type  
Still recording quality (only when using card)  
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
: High quality  
: Standard  
: Number of recordable stills is prioritized  
14. Movie recording time (only in movie recording  
mode)  
*5  
I
K
: DVD-RAM  
: DVD-R  
15. Remaining space on disc/card  
*6  
REM XX MIN : Remaining recordable minutes  
J : DVD-RAM (write-protected)  
during movie recording  
: Number of remaining recordable  
still images during still recording  
*7  
M
: DVD-R disc already finalized on this  
DVD Video Camera  
REM XX  
N
: DVD-R disc finalized on a device other  
than this DVD Video Camera  
16. Remaining battery level  
w(full charge)  
O
: SD Memory Card or MultiMediaCard  
: Locked SD Memory Card  
x
y
P
No display  
*4  
z(low remaining charge)  
17. Brightness/Color density of LCD screen or Volume  
:
The volume can be adjusted during external input  
and playback.  
18. Current date/time  
*1 Appears only with external input when the DVD Video Camera is in PHOTO recording mode.  
*2 Not displayed on VDR-M50PP.  
*3 When no disc or card is in the DVD Video Camera, or disc has not yet been initialized, a write-protected disc or  
locked card, or a disc or card with no remaining space, has been inserted.  
*4 When a disc or card that cannot be used in this DVD Video Camera is inserted  
*5 No remaining time or number will be displayed with a protected disc or locked card, or finalized DVD-R disc.  
*6 In XTRA mode, possible recording time may be longer than the displayed time.  
*7 The displayed number of recordable stills is for reference: The decreasing number may not be correct, depending  
on recording conditions (not displayed with a DVD-R disc).  
55  
lSwitching the information display mode  
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:  
Press the DISPLAY button.  
The full and minimum display modes will alternate.  
Full display mode: All types of information will appear.  
Minimum display mode: The recording mode (see 1 on page 54) and  
recording status (see 7 on page 54) will appear. If the DVD Video  
Camera has warning information, a warning message will appear.  
Note:  
The DVD Video Camera does not record the date and time as a part of the image. However, this information during  
recording will be recorded with image as data which can be checked on Disc Navigation screen during playback (See  
“Information Display during Playback” on page 63).  
lDisplay when recording an image of yourself  
When recording with the LCD screen facing the same direction as the lens, the  
operating status will appear, and in addition, the battery remaining level will blink  
when the battery pack has almost no remaining charge.  
The following operating status indicator willlight orblink togive a warning message  
to user. The message can be checked by returning the LCD monitor 180° to the  
original position from the position in which the LCD screen was facing the same  
direction as the lens.  
*
:The disc has almost no free space.  
:Write-protected disc or locked card is loaded.  
:You are attempting to record a still on DVD-R disc.  
Operating status/  
warning message  
Q
N
Battery remaining  
level  
No display :Disc or card that cannot be used has been loaded.  
l
:The disc or card is full, or you are attempting to  
record a copy-guarded image.  
Note:  
If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, the LCD screen will display a mirror image (left and right  
reversed).  
If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, you can also view subject image in the viewfinder.  
Although you can switch to the manual focus, exposure and on-screen display modes even during recording with LCD  
screen facing the same direction as lens, they will not appear on the screen.  
56  
123  
Zooming  
This DVD Video Camera allows you to record using optical 18- (on VDR-M50PP) or 10- (on VDR-M70PP)  
power zoom and digital zoom.  
Ifyou continue to holdthe zoom leveron the “T” control  
W:Recording wide area  
side with Dig. Zoom 40x or 240x specified, the digital  
zoom will be activated midway (when optical 18-power  
is exceeded on VDR-M50PP or optical 10-power is  
exceededonVDR-M70PP).Youcansetthedigitalzoom  
up to 40x in photo mode, and 40x and 500x (on VDR-  
M50PP) or 240x (on VDR-M70PP).  
(wide-angle)  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Dig. Zoom” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
Ca  
m
e r a F u nc  
t
i
on s Se t u p  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
T:Recordingenlarged  
image (telephoto)  
P r og r a  
m
W
E
I
S
g
D i  
.
Z
o om  
2 4 0 x  
4 0 x  
*
W i n d C u t  
Wi  
ENTER  
d
e
Of  
f
Note:  
RETURN  
RAM  
Dig. Zoom setting will be stored in memory even if the  
DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
2
3
Choose the desired  
magnification, and then press the A button.  
You can also use the DIGITAL ZOOM button on remote  
controller to switch the digital zoom setting: Pressing the  
button during movie recording will switch the setting  
between “Off”, “40×” and “500x” (on VDR-M50PP) or  
“240x” (on VDR-M70PP): Pressing the button during still  
recording will switch between “Off” and “40×”.  
If you set zoom to 500× (VDR-M50PP), 240× (VDR-  
M70PP) when recording still, digital zoom will be up to  
40×.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
Moving the zoom lever will display the digital zoom  
bar.  
*500xwillappearonVDR-M50PP;240xwillappear  
on VDR-M70PP.  
When a subject is zoomed, it may be momentarily out of  
focus.  
When digital zoom is engaged, the image quality will be  
rougher.  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
When using card, zooming only up to 40× is possible,  
even when “500x” (on VDR-M50PP) or “240x” (on VDR-  
M70PP) or “40×” has been chosen.  
8
0
:
0
2
0
0 0  
AM  
4
FINE  
S
E
P
3
If the power switch is set to “  
” with DVD-RAM disc  
loaded, zooming only up to 40x is possible, even when  
“500x(onVDR-M50PP)or240x(onVDR-M70PP)has  
been chosen.  
When you record pictures, with 10x or more of  
magnification, the DVD Video Camera is susceptible to  
shake. We recommend using a tripod (only for VDR-  
M50PP).  
When Dig. Zoom is "Off"  
T
W
When Dig. Zoom is "On"(40x)  
T
W
Digital zoom range  
When Dig. Zoom is "On"(240x)*  
(only in movie recording)  
W
T
Digital zoom range  
57  
Macro Recording  
Use the macro function when recording a small object from close-up position: You can shoot the subject as close as  
approximately 13/16” (2 cm) from the lens surface, magnifying the image to fill the screen.  
1
Aim the DVD Video Camera at the subject, and press  
down the zoom lever to “W” control side.  
Note:  
Zoom can be used, but the subject may not be focused,  
depending on the distance to the subject. In this case,  
move the zoom to “W” control side to focus.  
The amount of light tends to be insufficient during macro  
recording: If the subject image is too dark, use additional  
lighting.  
Using Conversion Lens (Optional-User Provided)  
Use tele-conversion lens or wide-conversion lens to record subjects for stronger telefoto or wide-angle effect. Use  
conversion lenses with the following filter diameter.  
VDR-M50PP/VDR-M70PP : 37 mm  
Remove the lens hood on the top surface of lens, and then attach the conversion lens over the lens.  
Lens hood  
Conversion lens  
(Remove)  
(Attach)  
Note:  
Be careful not to lose the removed lens hood.  
The four corners of screen may be dim depending on the  
conversion lens used.  
58  
Playing Back  
Insert a disc or card recorded on this DVD Video Camera (P. 46, 49).  
Before You Begin  
Turn the DVD Video Camera on (P. 50).  
123  
Playing Back  
Note:  
During playback of movie, playback sound will be heard  
from the speaker. Adjust the sound volume using the  
volume control buttons ((, )).  
YoucanplaybacktheaudiorecordedinDolbyAC3(2ch).  
To temporarily stop playback, press the A button.  
Press the A button again to restart playback.  
Even if you stop playback midway and immediately start  
recording again, the new image will be recorded after the  
lastsceneondiscorcard(thepreviousimageswillnotbe  
overwritten).  
Image data edited on PC or certain types of image data  
may not be displayed on this DVD Video Camera.  
Image data recorded on another camcorder may not be  
playable on this DVD Video Camera.  
Depending on the amount of data to be played back, it  
may take some time for the playback image to appear.  
Donotoperatethepowerswitchorremovethecardwhile  
the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or  
blinking: Doing so may damage the card or the data on  
card.  
1
2
Press A button in recording pause mode.  
The DVD Video Camera will enter the playback  
mode, and the scene you have recorded last will be  
played back.  
When playback is finished, the DVD Video Camera  
will enter pause mode at the last image on disc.  
If playback pause mode continues for as long as 5  
minutes, the DVD Video Camera will automatically  
return to recording pause mode.  
Press the g button.  
Playback will stop, and recordingpause mode will be  
restored.  
59  
123  
12  
Playback from Start of Disc or Card  
Use the Go To function (P. 62) or Disc Navigation  
function(P. 95)toplaybackfromthestartofdisc orcard.  
Search Playback of Movie  
During playback, tilt the joystick right or left and hold it:  
Search playback will start.  
Note:  
When you skip or search scenes from playback or  
playback pause, the screen will be dark briefly.  
See “Check 3” on page 150 if search playback does not  
operate normally.  
Hold to right  
: Scenes will be visually scanned  
forward  
Hold to left  
: Scenes will be visually scanned  
backward  
Release the joystick when you find the desired image:  
Normal playback will start from that point.  
12  
Frame Advance/Frame Back/Slow Playback of Movie  
Duringplaybackpause, tiltthejoystick:Frameadvance,  
frame back or slow playback will start.  
Note:  
In forward slow, a rapidly moving subject image may be  
distorted.  
Tilt right once  
Tilt left once  
: Picture will advance  
one frame.  
: Picture will go back  
one frame.  
The intervals for playing back frames in frame advance/  
frame back/slow playback are as follows:  
Frame advance and forward slow: Approx. 0.03 seconds  
Frame back and reverse slow: Approx. 0.5 seconds  
No sound will be heard during search playback or slow  
playback.  
Hold right  
Hold left  
: Forward slow playback  
: Reverse slow playback  
After frame advance, frame back or slow playback, the  
DVD Video Camera will enter playback pause mode.  
60  
12  
Skip Playback of Movie  
Duringplayback,tiltthejoystickupordowntolocatethe  
start of desired scene.  
Portion being played back  
Tilt down once  
Tilt up once  
Hold down  
:
:
:
To skip to the first image of the  
scene following the one being  
played back, and start playback.  
To return to the first image of the  
scene being played back, and start  
playback.  
To continuously locate the  
beginnings of scenes, starting  
fromthescenefollowingthescene  
being played back. When the  
desired image appears, release the  
joystick: Playback will start from  
that point.  
Tilt up twice  
Tilt up once Tilt down once Tilt down twice  
Scene 1  
Scene 2  
Scene 3  
Portion being played back  
Tilt down once  
Tilt up once  
Tilt down twice  
Scene 3  
Scene 1  
Scene 2  
Tiltingupthejoystickataportionseveralsecondsfrom  
the start of scene being played back will return to the  
start of the scene preceding that being played back.  
Hold up  
:
To continuously locate the  
beginnings of scenes backward,  
starting from the scene preceding  
the scene currently being played  
back. When the desired image  
appears, release the joystick:  
Playback will start from that point.  
Note:  
If you perform skip playback during playback pause, the  
DVD Video Camera will enter playback pause mode at  
the beginning of the located scene.  
Tilting down in the last scene on disc will set the DVD  
Video Camera to playback pause mode at the last image.  
See “Check 3” on page 150 if skip playback does not  
operate normally.  
13  
Playing Back Stills  
Tilt the joystick up or down during playback to quickly  
play back stills in sequence.  
[When using disc]  
Releasing the joystick will start continuous playback.  
Tilt down once  
:
To display stills one by one  
forward  
[When using card]  
Tilt up once  
:
To display stills one by one  
backward  
When the joystick is released, the photo at that point will  
bedisplayed,andthentheDVDVideoCamerawillenter  
playback pause mode.  
Set the slide show function for continuous display (P.  
129).  
61  
123  
Jumping to Specified Point (Go To)  
1
2
Press the MENU button  
during playback.  
Top  
End  
:Togotothestart, andenterplaybackpause.  
:To go to the end of last scene, and enter  
playback pause.  
Go To  
To p  
En d  
Spec  
i
f
y
Choosetheoption(pointyou  
wanttogoto),andthenpress  
the A button.  
Specify :To go to a specified point and enter  
playback pause. See the following for  
details.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
lSpecifying the point to view  
1
Choose “Specify” in step 2 above, and then press the  
A button.  
3
Press the A button to enter the selection.  
TheDVDVideoCamerawillgotothespecifiedpoint  
and enter playback pause mode.  
Pressing A again will start playback.  
The screen for specifying the point to go to will  
appear.  
Position of currently  
played back image  
Totalrecordingtimeof  
all selected scenes  
To cancel the “Go To” procedure midway, press the g  
button before going to the specified point.  
Go T o  
Note:  
TOP  
0: 00: 00  
CURRENT  
0: 03: 26  
END  
If multiple scenes are selected using the Disc Navigation  
function or SELECT button, choosing “Top” will jump to  
the beginning of selected scenes (P. 123).  
When multiple scenes are selected, the total time of  
selected scenes will appear in the “total recording time”  
display.  
0: 24: 24  
Cursor  
GO TO 0: 03: 26  
TOP END  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
Cursor position  
With card, the number of stills will appear at the “TOP”,  
“CURRENT”, “END” and “GO TO” indicators.  
The cursor may not move at same-pitch intervals.  
2
Use the joystick to select the desired time of chosen  
point.  
Tilt up  
Tilt down  
Tilt left or right  
:
:
:
To select the start.  
To select the end.  
–Press once:  
To move the cursor in 10-  
second units (1-still units for  
card)  
–Hold down: To move the cursor in 1-  
minute units (10-still units  
for card)  
Go T o  
TOP  
CURRENT  
0: 03: 26  
END  
0: 00: 00  
0: 24: 24  
GO TO 0: 0 0 : 00  
TOP END  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
(When the start of scene is selected)  
Cursor at current image position.  
Cursor at (GO TO) position.  
62  
123  
On-Screen Information Display  
Information Display during Playback  
Various types of information on recording will be superimposed on playback image you are viewing.  
SEP 30 2004  
No display  
Playback information  
display  
Recording date/time  
*1  
(movie),  
card)  
*28 Program or 5 Play List  
(still with disc) or  
(still with  
lSwitching the information display  
mode  
Press the DISPLAY button: You can switch the display  
mode of on-screen information.  
*3Numberofprogramorplaylistbeingplayedback(not  
displayed when all programs are being played back)  
*4Refer to “Disc/Card type” on page 55.  
*5Y :Will appear when each function is specified  
“On”  
When using disc:  
*1  
Recording mode  
*6a :Standard playback  
*5  
Scene No.  
Repeat play  
b
:Playback pause  
c :Forward search playback  
d :Reverse search playback  
06  
006  
RAM  
0 : 00 : 16  
e :Forward skip playback  
f :Reverse skip playback  
g :Forward frame advance  
Playback  
operation  
*6  
h :Reverse frame back  
Counter  
*4  
:Forward slow playback  
:Reverse slow playback  
Disc type  
Refer to “Playing Back” beginning on page 59 for  
instructions on how to operate.  
The “j” mark will appear on the first image on disc.  
The “i” mark will appear on the last image on disc.  
*3  
Program No. or Play List No.  
*2  
Program or Play List  
When using card:  
Recording date/time display: Shows the date/time  
when recording was started. Even when playback  
starts, the date/time display will not advance.  
No display: No information will appear. However,  
when the playback operation mode is switched, the  
symbol (q) will appear for approx. 3 seconds.  
*5  
Scene No. File name  
Lock  
*5  
DPOF  
Slide Show  
*5  
003  
100—0003  
*1  
*6  
Recording mode  
Playback operation  
Note:  
See “Using Disc Navigation” on page 95 and later for  
explanation on program and play list.  
63  
123  
Manually Focusing Subject  
The DVD Video Camera usually focuses on a subject automatically (autofocus). You can also manually  
focus a subject depending on the recording conditions.  
Focusing during Recording  
This DVD Video Camera automatically focuses a subject at the center of screen (auto-focus).  
When the DVD Video Camera is turned on, auto-focus will always be set.  
Focusing range  
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:  
On T (tele) side: approximately 3.6 feet (1 m) from lens surface to infinity  
On W (wide) side: approximately 13/16” (2 cm) from lens surface to infinity  
1
Press the FOCUS button during recording.  
“MF” will appear on the screen.  
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM  
3
0
MIN  
Manual Focus icon  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
2
3
Press the zoom lever down to “T” control side to  
zoom in on subject.  
Adjust with ) and  
( buttons  
Use the ) ( buttons to adjust the focus, while  
viewing the image in the viewfinder or on the LCD  
screen.  
Note:  
Pressing FOCUS will alternate between manual focus  
and auto focus. With auto focus, no indication will appear  
on the screen.  
Be sure to zoom in on your subject before manually  
focusingonit. IfyoubringthesubjectintofocusattheW”  
control side, focus will be faulty when you turn the zoom  
lever to the “T” control side to zoom in on the subject.  
Manualfocussettingwillbestoredinmemoryevenwhen  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
64  
Manually focus the following objects, which may not be automatically focused (See page 64):  
Objects not in  
the center of  
screen  
Objects with  
little variation  
in brightness,  
such as white  
wall  
Objects that  
are far and  
near at the  
same time  
Objects  
moving rapidly  
Objects lit by  
neon sign,  
spotlight, etc.  
whichglaresor  
emits strong  
light  
Dark objects  
Object behind  
glass with  
Night view  
waterdroplets,  
dirt on it  
65  
123  
Adjusting Exposure Manually  
The DVD Video Camera usually adjusts the exposure automatically. You can also manually adjust the  
exposure depending on the recording conditions.  
1
Press the EXPOSURE button during recording.  
The exposure indicator will appear on the screen.  
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM  
3
0
MIN  
Exposure indicator  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
Adjust with ) and  
( buttons  
2
Use the ) ( buttons to adjust the exposure while  
viewing the image in the viewfinder or on the LCD  
screen.  
Note:  
Pressing EXPOSURE will alternate between manual  
adjustment and auto exposure. With auto exposure, no  
indication will appear on the screen.  
Theexposuresettingwillbestoredinmemoryevenwhen  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
66  
123  
Using Auto Function  
Pressing the AUTO button will fully automate the camera functions.  
1
Press the AUTO button.  
“FULL AUTO” will be displayed on the screen of  
DVD Video Camera for several seconds.  
FULL AUTO  
FULL AUTO  
The following settings will reset to defaults:  
When setting  
full auto  
Function  
Page  
Program AE  
White balance  
Exposure  
Auto  
80  
81  
66  
64  
Auto  
Auto  
Focus  
Auto  
67  
Using External Microphone  
Connect external microphone (optional-user provided) to the external microphone jack of this DVD Video Camera.  
Clearer sound can be recorded. Turn on the switch on microphone and start recording. For details on microphone,  
see “Major Specifications” on page 165.  
To external  
microphone jack  
A/V  
MIC  
Note:  
This DVD Video Camera cannot use a plug-in power type microphone (power supplied from Video Camera).  
13  
Setting Video Flash (Only for VDR-M70PP)  
(See “Introduction to Optional Accessories” on page 145)  
When recording stills in a dark place, or the subject is lit  
Note:  
The DVD Video Camera automatically sets the shutter  
speed between 1/800 and 1/30 second (between 1/800  
and 1/10 second if Program AE has been set to Low  
Light) depending on subject brightness (P. 8 0 ).  
When you use Video Flash with AUTO mode, “( A” will  
always be displayed.  
from rear, it is recommended that you use the optional  
VW-FLH3 Video Flash* (P. 145): Refer to the  
instruction manual of Video Flash for use.  
An aim of an available range of Video Flash is about  
1 - 4 m.  
See “Switching Quality of Still Image (Quality)” on  
page 87 if you want to change the still quality mode.  
However, dark subjects may not be in clear focus even if  
the Video Flash is used. It is recommended that you  
illuminate a subject when recording in a dark place.  
When you use accessories for hot shoe, the power is  
supplied by this DVD Video Camera.  
Setting of  
On-screen  
Manner of  
emitting light  
Video Flash information  
AUTO  
Automatically  
A
emits light in dark  
place or in a place  
lit from rear.  
ON  
Always emits light  
regardless of  
brightness.  
OFF  
No light emission.  
* Unusable on VDR-M50PP.  
68  
123  
Viewing on TV Screen  
Connecting to a TV  
Use the provided AV/S input/output cable to connect the DVD Video Camera to a TV as follows:  
To video/  
audio input  
jacks  
To S-video  
input jack*  
To AV input/output jack  
A/V  
MIC  
Yellow  
White  
AV/S input/output cable  
Red  
(provided)  
* If your TV has an S-VIDEO input jack, you can connect the S-VIDEO plug to it.  
Note:  
Using S-VIDEO will deliver clearer playback.  
Before connecting, make sure that the volume on TV is  
turned down: Forgetting this may cause howling (see  
Terminology” on page 148) from the TV speakers.  
Carefully connect the input and output cables to the  
corresponding connections on the device the DVD Video  
Camera is being used with.  
Stereo Type with  
S-VIDEO Jack  
Stereo Type  
Monaural Type  
AUDIO VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO VIDEO  
L
R
R
White  
Yellow  
Red  
Yellow  
White  
Red  
White  
69  
123  
Viewing on TV Screen  
1
2
3
Turn on the TV and set the input selector to the Input  
connection the DVD Video Camera is connected to.  
This is often refered to as “line”.  
Note:  
Adjust the sound volume on TV.  
The infrared remote controller is useful when operating  
the DVD Video Camera while viewing an image on TV  
screen.  
Information that the DVD Video Camera is recording will  
appear on the TV screen: You can also display only part  
of information or switch off the display. Refer to “Setting  
OSD Output On or Off (On-Screen Display)” on page 90,  
and press the DISPLAY button to switch the display  
status.  
Refer to the TV instruction manual for how to switch  
the TV input.  
Turn the DVD Video Camera on.  
The image that the DVD Video Camera is viewing  
will appear on the TV screen.  
You can also monitor the image on the LCD screen or  
viewfinder of the DVD Video Camera.  
When copy-guarded disc is played back, no image will  
appear on TV screen.  
If you use TV with wide mode (aspect ratio 16:9) and set  
the TV to wide mode, the entire Disc Navigation display  
may not be displayed on the TV screen. If this happens,  
turn off the wide mode setting on TV (see the TV  
instruction manual for turning off the wide mode).  
Perform playback, recording or editing.  
You can perform playback, editing or editing on Disc  
Navigation while viewing on TV screen.  
70  
1
Playback on DVD Video Recorder/Player  
You can use a DVD video recorder (see “Terminology” on page 148) or DVD player that conforms to 8 cm  
DVD-RAM to play back DVD-RAM discs recorded on this DVD Video Camera. Note, however, that such  
DVD-RAM discs are not compatible with all DVD video recorders and all DVD players.  
1
2
Remove the disc from Round DVD Holder (See page  
73).  
Note:  
DonotinsertaDVD-Rdiscthathasnotbeenfinalizedinto  
a DVD video recorder: The recorded image data may be  
damaged.  
Insert the disc into the DVD video recorder/player  
and play it back.  
When playing back disc on another device, the Disc  
Navigation display will be different from the one on this  
DVD Video Camera.  
See the instruction manual for DVD video recorder/  
player.  
13  
To Customers who Have a DVD Video Recorder with a  
hard disk  
lThe following is possible using the hard disk of DVD video recorder:  
1
2
Writing the images recorded on DVD-RAM disc in  
DVD Video Camera to hard disk of DVD video  
recorder.  
[Creating a Video-only disc] (Use procedure A or B)  
A. Delete all photos on disc using Video Camera (See  
page 101).  
Be sure to use this DVD Video Camera to delete  
images: If you use the DVD video recorder to  
delete images, the images remaining on disc  
cannot be recorded to hard disk.  
Dubbing the images recorded on hard disk to a DVD-  
RAM disc or brand-new DVD-R disc.  
(See the Operating Instructions of DVD video  
recorder for details.)  
B. Use the Disc Navigation menu of DVD Video  
Camera to copy photos to card, and then delete those  
photos from the disc (See page 108).  
Note when recording to hard disk of DVD  
video recorder  
Use video-only recorded discs.  
You can also connect the DVD Video Camera and  
DVD video recorder via the provided AV/S input/  
output cable to record images to hard disk. Note,  
however, that the image quality will be slightly  
inferior.  
Depending on the DVD video recorder you are using,  
a disc with only photos or a disc on which photos and  
videos are mixed may not be recordable to the hard  
disk.  
No images recorded on a DVD-R disc on this Video  
Camera can be recorded to a hard disk.  
If your DVD video recorder has a card slot, you can  
write the photos recorded on a card on this Video  
Camera to disc or hard disk, so it is recommended that  
you record photos on card using this Video Camera.  
71  
2
Playback on DVD Player  
1
Finalize a recorded DVD-R disc.  
3
Insert the disc into the DVD player and play it back.  
See the instruction manual for DVD player.  
You need to finalize a disc to play it back on DVD  
player: See page 127.  
No further data can be recorded on finalized disc.  
Note:  
SeeTerminologyonpage 148forlinearPCMrecording.  
DVD-RdiscsrecordedonthisDVDVideoCameracanbe  
played back on Panasonic DVD players, but playback on  
all DVD players is not guaranteed.  
Note:  
Use this DVD Video Camera to finalize the DVD-R disc  
recorded on the DVD Video Camera.  
Playback may not be possible on some DVD players, or  
it may depend on the recording status of DVD-R discs: In  
such cases, play back the DVD-R disc on this DVD Video  
Camera.  
2
Remove the disc from Round DVD Holder.  
See “Removing from/and Replacing in Round DVD  
Holder” on page 73.  
72  
12  
Removing from/and Replacing in Round DVD Holder  
You can remove a DVD-RAM or a DVD-R disc used in this DVD Video Camera from Round DVD Holder and use  
the uncovered disc in DVD player, DVD-RAM recorder, drive for PC, etc., which conforms to 8 cm DVD-RAM or  
8 cm DVD-R. Removing disc from Round DVD Holder may vary with the disc maker: See the disc instruction sheet.  
The following explains the procedure for removing the disc from and replacing it in the Round DVD Holder made  
by Panasonic.  
It is recommended that you do not remove the disc from Round DVD Holder until camera recording is finished, in  
order to avoid getting dirt on disc.  
Note:  
Using discs removed from holders on various devices may not always be possible.  
How to Remove Disc  
1
Hold the Round DVD  
Release  
levers  
2
Without touching the  
Holder with SIDE A facing  
up. While pushing the two  
releaseleversinthedirection  
of arrows (1) marked on  
holder, slowly open SIDE A  
of the holder in the direction  
ofarrows(2), takingcarenot  
to drop the disc.  
recording/playback surface,  
hold the disc edge and center  
hole to remove it.  
1
1
SIDE A mark  
2
2
Do not open  
more than 90°.  
73  
Replacing Disc in Round DVD Holder  
1
OpenSIDEAoftheRoundDVDHolder, andreplace  
the disc in the holder with the SIDE A mark or label  
surface facing up, taking care not to touch the disc  
surface.  
2
Close SIDE A of the Round DVD Holder, and push it  
to lock the release levers at positions (3).  
3
OPEN marks  
SIDE A  
mark  
SIDEAmarksideor  
Label surface  
3
When the Hinge of Round DVD Holder Comes Off  
1
Push the hinged portion of the holder piece marked  
SIDE A with thumb and middle finger, and warp it in  
the direction of arrows (4).  
2
Fit the hinged portion of the other holder piece into  
the warped hinge portion.  
Note:  
Handle the disc carefully so that no scratches, dirt,  
fingerprints or dust adheres to the recording/playback  
surface.  
SIDE A mark side  
Hinged portions  
4
When notusingthe Round DVD Holder, store itin acase:  
Do not leave a bare holder as is.  
Be careful of dropping or impact: If you drop the Round  
DVD Holder, the disc may pop out.  
Do not subject the Round DVD Holder to force.  
Approx. 90°  
Disc Cleaning  
Use a soft, dry cloth to lightly wipe offany dust, dirt, etc.  
adhering to disc, as shown in the figure. Never use  
solvent. Do not use thinner, water, anti-static spray, etc.  
to clean disc.  
Use soft lint-free cloth to  
clean from inner to outer  
circumference in axial  
direction, or use puffer to  
blow dust off disc, like on  
camera lens.  
74  
123  
Recording (Dubbing) Images  
Before connecting this DVD Video Camera to another device, be sure to  
turn both devices off.  
Insert a recordable disc or card in this DVD Video Camera (see P. 28, 31).  
Before You Begin  
Recording (Dubbing) Images from Other Video Device  
You can record (dub) images from other video devices to disc or card in this DVD Video Camera.  
Use the AV/S input/output cable (provided) to connect the DVD Video Camera to the other AV device as follows:  
Signal flow  
To S-video  
output jack*  
To video/  
audio output  
jacks  
A/V  
To AV input/output jack  
MIC  
Yellow  
White  
AV/S input/output cable  
(provided)  
Red  
*
If you are using VDR-M70PP and the connected AV device has an S-VIDEO output jack,  
you can connect the S-VIDEO jack of AV/S input/output cable.  
The recorded contents can be played back in the same  
manner as when playing back camera images recorded  
on this DVD Video Camera.  
1
Set the input source on the  
DVD Video Camera to  
“LINE (L IN)”.  
L
IN  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
Still images can also be recorded on DVD-RAM disc or  
card. See “Switching External Input Recording Method  
(PHOTO Input)” on page 88 for details, and “Recording  
Stills” on page 52 for how to record still images.  
The “Input Source” setting will return to “CAMERA”  
whenever DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
Recording of most images is prohibited by the copy-  
guard signal to protect the copyright, except for images  
recordedoncamcordersforpersonalenjoyment.COPY  
PROTECTEDappearsintheseimages:Theycannotbe  
recorded on this DVD Video Camera.  
Typical copyright protected images include those of DVD  
video, LD, recorded video tapes, some parts of digital  
satellite broadcasts, etc.  
If a video signal that cannot be read by this DVD Video  
Camera is present -even in images recordedon the DVD  
Video Camera for personal enjoyment without copy-  
guard signal - the input image may not be recorded  
normally.  
Switch the input referring to  
“Input Source” on page 88.  
Choose “S LINE” to input  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
S-VIDEO signal (Only for VDR-M70PP).  
2
3
Turn on the connected device, and start playback.  
The picture will appear on the LCD screen or  
viewfinder of this DVD Video Camera.  
Press the REC button.  
Recording will start on this DVD Video Camera.  
The operation of this line-input recording is the same  
as for recording movie.  
Note:  
If you operate the DVD Video Camera connected to  
another device, always power the DVD Video Camera  
from household AC outlet using the AC adaptor.  
With VDR-M70PP, using S-VIDEO will enable you to  
record clearer images.  
If the input signal is interrupted by switching the channel  
on TV or switching the signal using video selector (see  
Terminologyonpage 148),normalrecordingcannotbe  
performed.  
The VDR-M50PP cannot record S-VIDEO input.  
Reduce the volume of external input sound heard from  
thebuilt-in speaker: Theloud volumemay causenoiseto  
enter the recorded image.  
75  
Recording (Dubbing) Images from Other Video Cameras  
You can record (dub) images from other video cameras on a disc or card in DVD Video Camera. Use the AV/S input/  
output cable (provided) to connect the DVD Video Camera to the other video camera.  
*1  
Signal flow  
A/V  
3 relay adapters  
*2  
MIC  
(generally available)  
AV/S input/output cable (provided)  
8mm video camera, VHS  
ToS-VIDEOoutputjackof  
video camera, etc.  
*3  
video camera, etc.  
*1: The AV/S input/output cable provided with this DVD Video Camera can be directly connected to some video  
cameras.  
*2: For relay adapters, JVC VZ-97 (a set of 3 adapters) and Audio-Technica ATL4C32M and PGF-517 (a set of 2  
adapters) are generally available.  
*3: If the video camera to be connected has an S-VIDEO output jack, you can connect it to the DVD Video Camera  
(VDR-M70PP only).  
1
Set the input source on the  
DVD Video Camera to  
“LINE (L IN)”.  
Note:  
L
IN  
With VDR-M70PP, using S-VIDEO will enable you to  
record clearer images.  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
Reduce the volume of external input sound heard from  
thebuilt-inspeaker:Theloudvolumemaycausenoiseto  
enter the recorded image.  
Still images can also be recorded on DVD-RAM disc or  
card. See “Switching External Input Recording Method  
(PHOTO Input)” on page 88 for details, and “Recording  
Stills” on page 52 for how to record still images.  
8
0
:
0
2
0
0 0  
AM  
Switch the input referring to  
“Input Source” on page 88.  
FINE  
S
E
P
3
4
Choose “S LINE” to input S-VIDEO signal (Only  
for VDR-M70PP).  
2
3
Turn on the connected device, and start playback.  
The picture will appear on the LCD screen or  
viewfinder of this DVD Video Camera.  
Press the REC button.  
Recording will start on this DVD Video Camera.  
The operation of this line-input recording is the same  
as for recording movie.  
76  
Recording (Dubbing) Images on Other Video Devices  
You can record (dub) images played back on this DVD Video Camera, onto other video devices.  
Use Disc Navigation to create a play list by selecting desired scenes of those recorded on this DVD Video Camera  
(P.116).  
Use the AV/S input/output cable (provided) to connect the DVD Video Camera to another video device as shown in  
the following figure:  
Signal flow  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
To S-VIDEO  
input jack of  
VCR, etc.*  
A/V  
To AV input/output  
jack  
MIC  
Yellow  
White  
AV/S input/output  
cable (provided)  
Red  
*
IfthevideodevicetobeconnectedhasanS-VIDEOinputjack,youcanconnectittotheDVDVideoCamera.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
Using S-VIDEO will deliver clearer images.  
Audioisheardfromthespeaker:Ifthevolumeistoohigh,  
noise may enter the dubbed image.  
Be sure to use the AC adaptor to power the DVD Video  
Camera from household AC outlet to prevent battery  
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Play” on the “PlayList” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
powerfromshuttingoffduringrecordingonanothervideo  
device.  
4
Use the “Start PlayList” screen to select the play list  
to be recorded (dubbed), and then press the record  
button on the connected device: The DVD Video  
Camera will start playback and the recording device  
will record (dub) it.  
77  
Advanced Techniques  
This section explains various settings to further extend the usefulness of this DVD Video Camera.  
Understanding Flow of Menus  
Press the MENU button during recording pause: The “Camera Functions Setup” menu screen will appear.  
Tilt the joystick up, down, to the left or the right to select a menu item, and then press the A button to choose the  
option.  
ThescreensusedheretoexplainmenusaredisplayedwhenDVD-RAMdiscisused.Someitemswillnotappearwhen  
a DVD-R disc or card is used, or when no disc is inserted.  
<Interpreting Setup Screen>  
Display of selected  
setup item  
Camer a F u nc t i on s S e t u p  
Auto  
Spo r t s  
P r og r a  
h i t e Ba l .  
E I S  
D i g . Zoo  
m
AE  
W
Po r t r a i t  
Spo t l i gh t  
Surf&Snow  
Low L i gh t  
RAM  
Settable  
Options  
m
Selection of setup items  
S :Camera Functions  
Setup  
W i n d C u t  
W i d e  
Display of disc or card  
being used (P. 55)  
T :Record Functions  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Setup  
:Date Setup  
V:LCD Setup  
W :Initial Setup  
Guide display  
Functions settable  
WIDE mode will not appear on VDR-M50PP.  
WhenWide16:9isspecified,blackbandswillappearacross  
the top and bottom of screen.  
*
The menu screen, the screen for playing back images  
recorded with “Wide 4:3” specified, and Disc Navigation  
screen are not set to Wide screen mode.  
78  
lFlow of Menus  
Refer to page indicated for details about each function.  
Camera Functions Setup  
Date Setup  
Program AE (P. 80)  
White balance (P. 81)  
EIS (P. 83)  
Digital zoom (P. 57)  
Wind Cut (P. 83)  
Wide*1 (P. 84)  
Display format (P. 41)  
Date setting (P. 40)  
Ca  
m
e r a Fun c t  
P r og r a  
i
ons Se  
t
t
t
up  
o
o
Da t e Se t up  
m
AE  
:
:
:
:
Au  
Au  
On  
W
E
h i t e Ba l .  
I
S
Da  
Da  
t
t
e
e
Mod e  
Se t  
:
M/D / Y  
D i g . Zoom  
i n d C u t  
W i d e  
ENTER  
4 0 x  
W
:
O f  
f
3
:
4
:
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
RAM  
RAM  
RETURN  
RAM  
*1 Not displayed on VDR-M50PP. Displayed on VDR-  
M70PP only for movies using DVD-RAM disc.  
LCD Setup  
Brightness (P. 91)  
Color density (P. 91)  
LCD S e t u p  
Recording Functions Setup  
Movie quality*2 (P. 86)  
B
Co  
r
i
l
gh  
t
n
e
s
s
Rec o r d F u n c t  
i
o n s Se  
t
up  
or L e v e l  
Input selection (P. 88)  
External still input*3 (P. 88)  
Self-timer*4 (P. 89)  
V I DEO Mode  
npu S o u r c e  
PHOTO I npu t  
Se i me r  
OSD Ou pu  
ENTER RETURN  
:
:
:
:
:
F
I NE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
I
t
CAMERA  
F
O f  
On  
i
e
f
l
d
l
f
T
On-screen information display  
t
t
Initial Setup  
RAM  
output *5(P. 90)  
Beep (P. 92)  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
Se t up  
Power Save (P. 92)  
Recording LED (P. 93)  
Language selection (P. 93)  
Reset (P. 94)  
*2: The quality mode will appear when using card (P. 87)  
*3: Displayed when DVD-RAM disc (PHOTO mode) or  
card is used, and input selection is set to external  
signal or S external signal.  
*4: Displayed only with stills  
*5: Displayed only when input source is set to  
“CAMERA”  
Beep  
Po er Save  
:
:
:
:
O
n
w
O f  
On  
f
Re c o r d LED  
L a ng u age  
Reset  
Eng  
l
i
s
h
ENTER  
RETURN  
You can use the joystick on DVD Video Camera to select various setting options in menu.  
Press the MENU button.  
Ca  
m
e r a Fun c t  
P r og r a  
i
ons Se  
t
t
t
up  
o
o
Camer a F u nc  
P r og r a  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
Auto  
Spo r t s  
or  
or  
m
AE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Au  
Au  
On  
m
AE  
W
E
h i t e Ba l .  
Wh i t e Ba l .  
I
S
E
I
S
Po r  
Spo  
Su r  
Low  
t
t
f
r
l
a
i
i
t
D i g . Zoom  
i n d C u t  
W i d e  
ENTER  
4 0 x  
D i g . Zoom  
n d C u t  
W i d e  
ENTER  
gh t  
W
O f  
f
3
W
i
&Snow  
L
4
:
i
gh t  
RAM  
RETURN  
RAM  
RETURN  
Rec o r d F u n c t  
i
o n s Se up  
t
Press the A button directly to choose an option from menu.  
To return to the previous screen, press the C button.  
Pressing the MENU button again will cause the menu screen to  
disappear.  
V I DEO Mode  
npu S o u r c e  
OSD Ou pu  
:
:
:
F
I NE  
I
t
CAMERA  
On  
t
t
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
With VDR-M70PP, if the MENU button is pressed with a  
Note:  
still image displayed, the size of the image will change.  
PressingtheMENUbuttonduringrecordingwillnotwork.  
The menu screen will disappear when it is left for approx.  
1 minute without any operation.  
Pressing the MENU button again will restore the original  
image size.  
79  
123  
Setting Up Camera Functions  
See page 79 for how to set.  
No menu screen appears with external input.  
Before You Begin  
Selecting Shooting Mode to Match the Subject (Switching Program AE Mode)  
This DVD Video Camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture according to the subject brightness for  
optimum recording: You can also specify one of six modes depending on subject conditions, recording environment  
or purpose of filming.  
Note:  
You can check the selected AE mode on the on-screen  
information display. However, nothing will appear in Auto  
mode.  
MENU  
Theshootingmodesetasabovewillbestoredinmemory  
even if the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
aAuto :TheDVDVideoCameraautomaticallyjudges  
the subject and surrounding environment for optimum  
recording.  
Sports : Reduces blurring when recording rapidly  
moving subjects such as in golf or tennis.  
If the Sports mode is used under a fluorescent light, the  
image may flicker: In this case, use the Auto mode for  
recording.  
Portrait : Createsashallowdepthoffield so thatthe  
personorsubjectappearsagainstasoftenedbackground.  
Spotlight : Prevents overexposure of subject  
portraitface, etc. whenstronglightstrikesthe subject, as  
in a wedding or on stage.  
Surf & Snow : Prevents underexposure of subject  
portrait face, etc. in a place where reflection of light is  
intense, such as at the seaside in midsummer or on a ski  
slope.  
Tilt up/down and left/right  
to select, and then press  
A to designate.  
1
2
Press the MENU button, use the joystick to choose  
“Program AE” on the “Camera Functions Setup”  
screen, and then press the A button.  
The options will appear to the right of “Program AE”.  
Use the joystick to choose  
Camer a F u nc  
P r og r a  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
thedesiredoption,andthen  
press the A button: The  
selected option will be set.  
m
AE  
Auto  
Spo r t s  
W
E
h i t e Ba l .  
I
S
Po r  
Spo  
Su r  
Low  
t
t
f
r
l
a
i
i
t
D i g . Zoo  
m
gh t  
W
i
n
d
C u t  
&Snow  
L
i
gh t  
RAM  
W i d e  
ENTER  
Low Light : Allows user to record in a dark place  
even with decreased lighting: However, an after-image  
will appear with a moving subject.  
RETURN  
Selected AE mode  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
Note that the Low Light mode cannot be used when the  
recording quality mode is STD.  
If there is difficulty in automatically focusing subject  
image, adjust the focus manually.  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
3
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
The menu screen will disappear.  
80  
Adjusting Color (White Balance)  
ThisDVDVideoCameraautomaticallyadjuststhecolor  
of subject. Change the white balance setting depending  
on the recording conditions.  
lSetting white balance manually  
1
Point the DVD Video  
Camera at a white  
On-screen  
object so that it fills the  
screen. Use an object  
that is not transparent.  
Mode  
Auto  
Setting contents  
display  
White balance always  
automatically adjusted  
None  
If the object that fills  
the screen is not  
focused, correct the  
focus using “Manual  
Focus”, P. 64.  
Set  
You can manually adjust  
white balance to match  
the light source or  
situation  
White thick paper  
h
i
Outdoor  
Indoor  
To record in fine weather  
To record under  
incandescent light,  
halogen light or bulb-  
color type fluorescent  
light  
2
3
Press the MENU  
Camer a F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
j
button, choose “White  
Bal.”, “Set”, and then press  
the A button.  
P r og r a  
m
W
E
D i  
Au t  
Set  
Ou t do o r  
I ndoor  
o
I
S
g
.
Zoo  
m
W
i
n
d
C u t  
W i d e  
1
2
Press the MENU button,  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Camer a F u nc  
P r og r a  
W
E
D i  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
choose “White Bal.” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
m
Au t  
Set  
o
I
S
g
n
Hold A pressed until the  
hindicatorchangesfrom  
blinking to a steady light.  
When the “h“ indicator  
lights, the white balance  
setting will be complete.  
.
d
Zoo  
Cu  
m
t
Ou t do o r  
I ndoor  
W
i
W i d e  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Choose the desired option,  
and then press the A  
button.  
Set  
EXIT  
RAM  
0
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
REM  
0
MIN  
4
Pressthegbuttontoendthe  
setting.  
0
REM  
:
0
0
:
0
0
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
3
0
MIN  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0 4  
White balance mode  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
Note:  
Note:  
The white balance mode can be confirmed using the on-  
screen information.  
ItisrecommendedthatyouspecifyDig. Zoom:Off(See  
page 57) before setting white balance.  
In Set mode, resetting will be necessary when the DVD  
Video Camera is turned off. (All other modes of the white  
balance will be stored in memory.)  
If “Input Source: LINE” or “S LINE” has been specified,  
you cannot use the “Set” mode of white balance (P. 88).  
Do not use a colored object when setting white balance:  
The appropriate tint cannot be set.  
The whitebalance cannot be setwhen the digital zoom is  
engaged or under low light: The hindicator will blink  
at this time.  
If the white balance that was manually set before is kept,  
the hindicator will blink (re-setting the white balance  
will change the hindicator to a steady light).  
81  
Note:  
Do not block the infrared sensor (see “Terminology” on  
page 148) with hand, etc.  
Infrared sensor block  
Ifaoptional-userprovidedteleorwide-conversionlensis  
used, theautowhite balancemay notoperatedepending  
ontherecordingconditions.Ifthishappens,set themode  
to match the recording conditions, or manually set the  
white balance.  
Be sure to remove the lens cap before turning the DVD  
Video Camera on: If the DVD Video Camera is turned on  
with the lens capped, the white balance will not work  
normally.  
82  
Using the Electronic Image Stabilizer (EIS)  
When you use zoom to record a magnified subject image, it will correct fuzziness in the recorded image.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “EIS” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
Afterrecording withEIS setto “Off”, it isrecommended  
thatyoureturnthesettingtoOnandthenturntheDVD  
Video Camera off, unless you normally record with EIS  
“Off” setting.  
Ca  
m
e r a F u nc  
t
i
on s Se t u p  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
P r og r a  
m
W
E
D i  
I
S
g
On  
Of  
.
Z
o om  
f
W
i
n d Cu t  
W i d e  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Note:  
The EIS setting will be stored in memory even when the  
DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
2
3
Choose “On” or “Off”, and  
then press the A button.  
ItisrecommendedthatyouspecifyEIS:Offwhenusing  
the DVD Video Camera on a desk or tripod.  
When “EIS: On” is specified, there will be a slight  
difference between the actual movement and the  
movement on screen.  
Gross camera shake may not be entirely corrected even  
if “EIS: On” is specified. Firmly hold the DVD Video  
Camera with both hands.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
lChecking whether EIS is On or Off  
YoucancheckwhetherEISisOnorOffbytheon-screen  
information display.  
EIS may not operate correctly when the tele or wide-  
conversion lens (optional-user provided) is used.  
When you record pictures with setting 10x or more of  
magnification and turning the EIS to “ON” in dim places,  
after-images may stand out. In this case, we recommend  
usingatripodwithturning theEIS to “OFF” (only forVDR-  
M50PP).  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
EIS  
8
:
0 0 AM  
00 4  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
The EIS function cannot be used when still images are  
recorded on the card (only for VDR-M70PP).  
Reducing Wind Noise during Recording (Wind Cut)  
When recording sound from the microphone built into this DVD Video Camera, you can reduce wind noise in  
recording.  
If “Wind Cut: ON” is specified, the low-frequency components in the sound picked up by microphone will be cut off  
during recording: This makes it easier to hear the target voice or sound during playback.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Wind Cut” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
Note:  
Camer a F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
AE  
h i t e Ba l .  
You can also use the on-screen display to confirm that  
Wind Cut has been set.  
P r og r a  
m
W
E
I
S
TheWindCutsettingwillbestoredinmemoryevenwhen  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
The Wind Cut function will work only during movie  
recording.  
The Wind Cut function works only with the built-in  
microphone: It will not function when using an external  
microphone (P. 68).  
D i g . Zoo  
m
W
i
n d Cu t  
W i d e  
ENTER  
On  
Of  
f
RETURN  
RAM  
2
3
Choose the desired option,  
and then press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to  
end setting.  
0
REM  
:
0
0
:
0
0
0
3
MIN  
8
0
:
0
2
0AM  
FINE  
S
E
P
3
0
0
4
Wind cut icon  
83  
1
Setting to Wide TV Screen Mode (Wide) (Only for VDR-M70PP)  
If you view the images recorded with “Wide 16:9” specified on a wide-screen TV (aspect ratio 16:9), screen image  
will be wider than the images recorded with “Wide 4:3” (aspect ratio 4:3) by the size of the areas on left and right  
(in dotted lines).  
“Wide 4:3” specified  
(aspect ratio 4:3)  
“Wide 16:9” specified  
(aspect ratio 16:9)  
1
Press the MENU button, choose “Wide” on the  
“Camera Functions Setup” menu screen, and then  
press the A button.  
2
3
Choose “16:9”, and then press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
C a  
m
e
r
a
r
h
I
i
i
F
g
t
u
r
e
n
a
c
m
B a  
t
i
o
n s S e  
t
u
p
C a  
m
e
r
a
r
h
I
i
i
F
g
t
u
r
e
n
a
c
m
B a  
t
i
o
n s S e  
t
u
p
P
W
E
D
W
o
i
S
A E  
l
P
W
E
D
W
o
i
S
A E  
l
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
.
.
g.  
nd C u  
Z
o
o
m
t
g.  
nd C u  
Z
o
o
m
t
1
4
6
:
:
3
9
8
0
:
0
2
0AM  
4 : 3  
W i d e  
W i d e  
FINE  
S
E
P
3
0
0
4
EN T ER  
RE T URN  
RA  
M
EN T ER  
RE T URN  
RA  
M
Wide 16:9 icon  
When viewing playback on an ordinary TV screen later, specify “Wide 4:3”: Recording with “Wide 16:9” specified  
will be played back on an ordinary TV with vertical elongation of image.  
.
An image recorded with “Wide 16:9” specified will appear as follows :  
Display in viewfinder (expanded vertically)  
Display on LCD monitor screen  
84  
Note:  
The Wide setting will be kept even after the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
The VDR-M50PP does not have the Wide setting.  
Even if you use the provided application software (MyDVD) and dub wide movies on DVD-RAM disc to DVD-R disc, the  
screen image will not be wider. DVD-R disc does not support the Wide setting and it is displayed lengthwise when you  
playback this disc.  
Before recording movies to the DVD-R disc, set the Wide setting beforehand to “4:3”.  
The Wide 16:9 setting can be used when recording movies on DVD-RAM disc: It is not compatible with still recording,  
recording of external input or recording on DVD-R disc.  
ImagesrecordedwithWide16:9(aspectratio16:9)specifiedcannotberestoredtoWide4:3setting(aspectratio4:3).  
The characters of dates and titles will be longer in the vertical direction on a wide-screen TV and on the LCD monitor  
of DVD Video Camera.  
Even ifyousetthe Widesetting at16:9”, screen image will appearat4:3when you pressthe MENU button and display  
the menu screen.  
When you view the image recorded with “Wide 16:9” specified on the television or PC monitor with black bands at the  
top and bottom of the picture, flicker may occur between the black bands and the picture.  
The Wide 16:9 setting is not compatible with ID-1/ID-2*.  
Connecting the DVD Video Camera to the S1 input jack of TV will automatically switch the TV to Wide setting: See TV  
instruction manual for details.  
*
This system records the aspect ratio (16:9, 4:3) information in void space between video signals.  
85  
Setting Up Record Functions  
12  
Switching Movie Quality (VIDEO Mode)  
Choose the movie quality from “XTRA” (only with DVD-RAM disc), “FINE”, “STD” and “LPCM” (only with  
DVD-R disc).  
It is recommended that you record critical subjects in “XTRA” or “FINE” when you are using a DVD-RAM  
disc, or in “FINE” with a DVD-R disc.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “VIDEO Mode” on  
the “Record Functions  
Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Note:  
Re c o r d F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
The movie quality setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
The “VIDEO Mode” setting will not change even if the  
DVD-RAM disc is replaced with a DVD-R disc, or vice  
versa. However, the setting will switch to “FINE” in the  
following cases:  
V
I
DEO Mode  
XTRA  
F I NE  
STD  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
OSD Ou t p u t  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
2
3
Choose the desired quality  
mode, and then press the A button.  
- When the mode is set to “XTRA” with a DVD-RAM disc  
inserted and then the disc is replaced with a DVD-R  
disc  
- When the mode is set to “LPCM” with a DVD-R disc  
inserted and the disc is replaced with a DVD-RAM disc  
When using DVD-R disc, you cannot switch the movie  
quality while recording on the disc: The DVD Video  
Camera will be automatically set to the movie quality first  
used with the disc for recording.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
0
REM  
:
0
0
:
0
0
0
3
MIN  
The movie quality setting is effective only during movie  
recording: The setting will not be displayed during  
recording of stills.  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
Movie quality  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
Block-like noise may appear in recorded image, or the outline of subject image is distorted under the recording  
conditions listed below: Pan the DVD Video Camera as slowly as possible. (Block noise is likely to appear in “STD”  
mode):  
If there is a complicated pattern in the background (as in figure on botton left)  
If the DVD Video Camera is moved excessively or quickly  
If subject is moving rapidly even when the DVD Video Camera is not moving  
(Image when block-like noise occurs)  
(Image without block-like noise)  
86  
3
Switching Quality of Still Image (Quality)  
You can switch the still recording quality only when using card.  
It is recommended that you use “FINE” when recording vital images.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Quality” on the  
“Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
3
Press the MENU button to  
end setting.  
Re c o r d F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
REM  
9
9
9
Q
u
a
l
i
t
y
FINE  
NORM  
ECO  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
Se T i mer  
OSD Ou t p u t  
l
f
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0 4  
NORM  
S E P 3 0  
2
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
Choosetheoptionyouwant,  
and then press the A button.  
Still recording quality  
Note:  
The still quality setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
“PHOTO Input” is displayed only when “Input Source” is  
set to “LINE” or “S LINE” (VDR-M70PP only).  
“OSDOutputisdisplayedonlywhenInputSourceisset  
to “CAMERA”.  
87  
123  
Receiving Image from Another Device (Input Source)  
If you wish to input an image from another device to this DVD Video Camera, you must first switch the setting on  
the DVD Video Camera. Refer to the explanation starting from page 75 on how to connect the DVD Video Camera  
to other devices or record images input from them.  
Setting  
CAMERA  
LINE  
Contents  
On-screen display  
This option usually selected.  
No display  
L IN  
To input image from another device.  
S LINE*  
To input S-VIDEO signal from another device.  
S IN  
* Displayed on VDR-M70PP only.  
1
2
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Input Source” on  
the “Record Functions  
Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
3
Press the MENU button to  
end setting.  
Re c o r d F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
L
IN  
0
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
REM  
V
I
DEO Mode  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
OSD Ou t p u t  
CAMERA  
L
I
NE  
L I N E  
Note:  
S
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0 4  
The “Input Source” setting will  
returntoCAMERAwhenever  
the DVD Video Camera is  
turned off.  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Choose “LINE” or “S  
LINE”, and then press the A button.  
External input icon  
If you pull or push the card on  
” mode, “Input Source” setting will return to  
”CAMERA”.  
“PHOTO Input” is displayed only when “Input Source” is  
set to “LINE” or “S LINE” (VDR-M70PP only).  
“OSDOutputisdisplayedonlywhenInputSourceisset  
to “CAMERA”.  
13  
Switching External Input Recording Method (PHOTO Input)  
When “Input Source: LINE or S LINE” is specified, you can record stills of externally input images on either a DVD-  
RAM disc or a card. The DVD Video Camera can record an external image with little movement by specifying  
“Frame”, but “Field” is recommended for recording an image with movement.  
Recording  
format  
Details of setting  
On-screen display  
Does not suit recording of frequently moving video subjects, despite high  
image quality. Frame suits recording of less moving video.  
(with disc)  
(with card)  
Frame  
Suitable for recording of frequently moving video subjects.  
(with disc)  
(with card)  
Field  
1
2
Press the MENU button,  
choose “PHOTO Input” on  
the “Record Functions  
Setup” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
3
Press the MENU button  
to end setting.  
Still external input mode  
Re c o r d F u nc  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
PHOTO I n p u t  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
F r ame  
L
IN  
REM  
Se  
l
f
T i mer  
F
i
e
l
d
9
9
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
Selectthedesiredoptionand  
then press the A button.  
88  
Note:  
The PHOTO Input setting can be confirmed using the on-  
screen information.  
The PHOTO Input setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
Refer to “Recording (Dubbing) Images” on page 75 to  
see how to connect the DVD Video Camera to another  
device.  
“PHOTO Input” is displayed only when “Input Source” is  
set to “LINE” or “S LINE” (VDR-M70PP only).  
“OSDOutputisdisplayedonlywhenInputSourceisset  
to “CAMERA”.  
13  
Self Timer  
You can record photos using the self timer function, as with ordinary cameras.  
The self timer function is valid only when recording photos (stills).  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Self Timer” on the  
“Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
4
Press the REC button.  
Re c o r d F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
Se T i mer  
OSD Ou t p u t  
The recording indicator at the front of DVD Video  
Camera will blink.  
The Self timer indicator will start to count down, and  
recording will commence approximately 10 seconds  
later.  
l
f
On  
Of  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
2
3
Select “On”, and then press  
the A button.  
Note:  
You can also check that self timer has been set by  
reviewing the on-screen information.  
The self timer will be set.  
To release the selftimer mode, choose “Off” onthemenu  
screen or turn DVD Video Camera off.  
Tosuspendselftimer, presstheREC buttonagainbefore  
recording starts, or press the g button.  
“PHOTO Input” is displayed only when “Input Source” is  
set to “LINE” or “S LINE” (VDR-M70PP only).  
“OSDOutputisdisplayedonlywhenInputSourceisset  
to “CAMERA”.  
Press the MENU button to end the setting.  
REM  
9
9
9
1
0
Self timer recording  
8
:
0 0 AM  
0 0  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
89  
123  
Setting OSD Output On or Off (On-Screen Display)  
If you connect this DVD Video Camera to a TV to view images on TV screen, you can switch off the on-screen  
information (displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen) from the TV screen.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
chooseOSDoutputonthe  
“Record Functions Setup”  
menu screen, and then press  
the A button.  
Note:  
Re c o r d F u nc  
t
i
on s S e t u p  
The “OSD Output” setting will return to “On” whenever  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
V
I
DEO Mode  
I n p u t Sou r ce  
OSD Ou t p u t  
Even if “Off” is chosen, the on-screen information will  
appear during playback. See page 63 for playback on-  
screen information display.  
On  
Of  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Evenaftertheon-screeninformationisremovedfromthe  
TV screen, it will still appear in the viewfinder or on the  
LCD screen.  
The on-screen display output functions only when the  
“Input Source” setting is set to “CAMERA”: It cannot be  
set during “LINE” or “S LINE” (VDR-M70PP only).  
“OSDOutputisdisplayedonlywhenInputSourceisset  
to “CAMERA”.  
2
3
Choose “On” or “Off”, and  
press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
LCD screen or viewfinder  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
8
:
0 0 AM  
00  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
“Off” setting  
“On” setting  
0
REM  
:
0
0
3
:
0
0
MIN  
0
8
:
0 0 AM  
00  
FINE  
S E P 3 0  
2
4
TV screen  
TV screen  
90  
123  
LCD Setup  
Setting Brightness of LCD Screen (Brightness)  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Brightness” on the  
“LCD Setup” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
LCD S e t u p  
Note:  
B r  
Co  
i
l
gh t n e s s  
e v e l  
Thebrightness settingwillbe stored in memory evenwhen  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
o
r
L
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
The brightness adjustment  
bar will appear on the screen.  
2
Use the joystick for  
adjustment.  
LCD S e t u p  
B r  
Co  
i
l
gh t n e s s  
Tilt left  
:The screen  
becomes  
dimmer  
o
r
L
e v e l  
ADJUST  
ENTER  
RAM  
Tilt right  
:The screen  
becomes  
brighter  
Brightness  
adjustment bar  
Setting Color Density of LCD Screen (Color Level)  
1
Choose “Color Level” on  
the “LCD Setup” menu  
screen, and then press the  
A button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
LCD S e t u p  
Note:  
B r  
Co  
i
l
gh t n e s s  
e v e l  
The color level setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
Even if the brightness or density of LCD monitor screen  
is changed, the brightness or density of the recorded  
image itself will not change.  
o
r
L
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
The color density  
adjustment bar will appear  
on the screen.  
2
Use the joystick for  
adjustment.  
LCD S e t u p  
B r  
Co  
i
l
gh t n e s s  
Tilt left  
:For lighter  
color  
:For denser  
color  
o
r
L
e v e l  
ADJUST  
ENTER  
RAM  
Tilt right  
Color density  
adjustment bar  
91  
123  
Initial Settings  
Switching Operating Sound On or Off (Beep)  
Setting  
On  
Contents  
Beep is heard when the power switch is turned on/off, the REC button is pressed,  
etc.  
No beep is heard.  
Off  
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”, and then press the A button.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Beep” on the  
“InitialSetupmenuscreen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e t u p  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Reset  
e
p
On  
Of  
S
a v e  
f
Note:  
The “Beep” setting willbe stored in memory even when the  
DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Turning DVD Video Camera Off Automatically (Power Save)  
Setting  
On  
Contents  
To engage power save. If the DVD Video Camera is left in recording pause mode  
without being operated for 5 minutes, it will automatically turn off to prevent the  
battery from discharging needlessly.  
To cancel power save.  
Off  
Note:  
To turn the DVD Video Camera on again from automatic  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choosePowerSaveonthe  
“InitialSetupmenuscreen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e t u p  
off activated by the power save function, set the power  
switchtoOFF”, andthensetitto“  
The Power Save setting will not appear in the on-screen  
information display.  
The Power Save setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
”, “  
or“  
”.  
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Reset  
e
p
S
a v e  
On  
Of  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”, and  
then press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
92  
Turning Record LED On or Off (Record LED)  
You can switch off the recording indicator on the front of DVD Video Camera even during recording.  
Setting  
On  
Contents  
The recording indicator will light red to show that the DVD Video Camera is recording.  
The recording indicator will not light even during recording.  
Off  
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”, and then press the A button.  
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
Recording indicator  
Note:  
The Record LED setting will not appear in the on-screen  
information display.  
The Record LED setting will be stored in memory even  
when the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
Specify “Record LED: Off” when recording a subject  
behind glass or a water tank that reflects light: The  
reflected light of a recording indicator will not be  
recorded.  
When using the self timer function, the recording  
indicator will blink when the REC button is pressed  
regardless of whether Record LED is On or Off.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Record LED” on  
the “Initial Setup” menu  
screen, and then press the  
A button.  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e t u p  
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Reset  
e
p
S
a v e  
On  
Of  
f
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Changing Display Language (Language)  
You can change the language used to display the menu and information.  
The following shows that English has been changed to French.  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Language” on the  
“InitialSetupmenuscreen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
Se  
t
up  
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L an gu age  
Reset  
e
p
Eng l i sh  
F r ança  
Español  
Note:  
S
a v e  
i
s
The language setting will be stored in memory even when  
the DVD Video Camera is turned off.  
Deu  
t
s ch  
ano  
RAM  
I
t
a
l
i
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
Select “Français”, and then  
press the A button.  
Con  
f
i
g u r  
a
t
i
on  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
B
i
p
Én e r g  
i
e
DEL En r e g.  
L an gu e  
F r ança  
i
s
Rég  
ENTRER  
l
.
Dé  
f
aut  
RETOUR  
RAM  
93  
Resetting Menu Settings to Defaults (Reset)  
You can restore menu settings to defaults [initial settings at the factory (P. 164)].  
1
Press the MENU button,  
choose “Reset” on the  
“InitialSetupmenuscreen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
3
Press the MENU button to end setting.  
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e t u p  
Be  
Po w e r  
R e c o r d LED  
L a n g u a g e  
Reset  
e
p
Note:  
S
a v e  
Tocancelresettingmidway,chooseNOontheverification  
screen in step 2 or press the g button.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
The screen for verifying  
reset will appear.  
2
If you are sure that you wish  
to reset, use the joystick to  
choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
Re s e t  
ENTER  
Re s e t  
?
YES  
NO  
RAM  
The settings have now been  
reset to defaults.  
94  
Disc Navigation  
123  
Using Disc Navigation  
Starting or Terminating Disc Navigation  
Disc Navigation is a tool for editing scenes recorded on this DVD Video Camera.  
Following is an explanation of “scene” and “program” so that you will be able to make the most use of the Disc  
Navigation function.  
The screens in this operating manual are basically those that will appear when DVD-RAM disc is used: Some items  
will not appear when DVD-R disc or card is used, but the operations are the same.  
Turn the DVD Video Camera on (P.50).  
When using disc: Set the power switch to “  
When using card: Set the power switch to “  
” or “  
”.  
”.  
Before You Begin  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
The Disc Navigation screen (shown on page 96) will  
appear.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Disc Navigation will be terminated and the DVD  
Video Camera will enter recording pause mode.  
You can also press the g button to end Disc  
Navigation.  
95  
The following screen will appear when DVD-RAM disc is used: Some display components will not appear when  
DVD-R disc or card is used.  
Thumbnail (see “Terminology” on page 148)  
*1  
Selected scene number  
Total number of scenes  
/
Al l Pr og r a  
m
s
001 / 014  
Cursor  
*2  
*4  
Current page position  
Bar graph  
Still image icon  
*3  
*5  
Operation guide  
Disc type icon  
PLAY  
RAM  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
Scene number refers to display number on thumbnail display screen.  
No still icon will appear for card.  
The operation guide will vary depending on the operation status of DVD Video Camera.  
Appears when 13 scenes or more have been recorded.  
R” appears for DVD-R disc. “ ” will appear for card.  
Note:  
The background color of screen allows you to identify  
whether disc or card is in DVD Video Camera.  
- Purple: When disc is inserted  
- Light blue: When card is inserted  
Pressing the DISPLAY button will display the recording  
date/timeofthesceneonwhichthecursorisplacedinthe  
space for operation guide. Pressing DISPLAY again will  
display the operation guide.  
If no disc or card is inserted, the Disc Navigation screen  
cannot be displayed even by pressing the DISC  
NAVIGATION button.  
Each time Disc Navigation is started with a DVD-R disc  
inserted, message “Creating Thumbnail ...will appear.  
After the message appears, the Disc Navigation screen  
will appear.  
If the following type of disc or card is inserted, the Disc  
Navigation screen will appear or some message will be  
displayed:  
- Write-protected disc  
- Locked card  
- Finalized DVD-R disc  
Do not leave the disc navigation screen displayed on TV  
to which the DVD Video Camera is connected: Doing so  
could result in displayed image retention or phosphor  
degradation of TV screen.  
96  
Playing Back from Disc Navigation Screen  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
3
Press the A button.  
Use the joystick to select the desired scene.  
Playback will start from the selected scene.  
Note:  
The selected scene will be framed: This is called a  
“cursor”.  
Tilting the joystick to left or right will move the cursor to  
the preceding or following scene.  
Tilting it up or down will move to preceding or following  
page.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
001 / 014  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
007 / 014  
Up or Down  
Left or Right  
A
PLAY  
RAM  
PLAY  
RAM  
lWhen playback ends  
The DVD Video Camera will  
enter playback pause mode at  
the last image of last scene.  
Pressing the g or DISC  
NAVIGATION button will  
restore the Disc Navigation  
screen.  
Playback pause  
If playback pause continues for  
as long as 5 minutes, the Disc Navigation screen will  
automatically be restored.  
lPlaying back stills  
A still will be displayed for approx. 3 seconds.  
Whenplayingbackstillsoncard,playbackwillstopafter  
each still playback.  
Note:  
Press the A button to temporarily stop playback.  
Pressing A again will start from that point.  
If you press the A button after playback of the last  
scene on disc finishes, playback will start again from the  
beginning of disc.  
Pressing the g button will always restore the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
When playing back a still with a large number of pixels on  
card,Playback.willappear,anditwilltakesometimefor  
the still to appear.  
97  
Selecting Multiple Scenes  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Use the joystick to select the desired scene.  
Press the SELECT button once:  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to randomly select multiple  
scenes.  
To cancel a selected scene, select the scene to be  
canceled, and then press the SELECT button.  
To cancel all selected scenes, press the g button.  
The selected scene will be framed in red and yellow.  
Note:  
Although scenes can be randomly selected, playback will  
always start from the lowest scene number.  
Selecting Consecutive Scenes Together  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Note:  
You can know the status of scenes from the colors of  
cursor and bar graph:  
Usethejoysticktoselectthe  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
005 / 014  
desired scene.  
Cursor Bar graph  
Yellow Light blue  
Status of scenes  
Current cursor position  
Range of scenes being  
selected  
PLAY  
RAM  
Blue  
Red  
Light blue  
Red  
Scenes already selected  
Yellow frame  
Pressing the A button after selecting scenes will play  
backonlytheselectedscenesfromthebeginningofeach  
scene.  
You can alsoselect scenes in reverse from the last scene  
in the range.  
To release multiple selection, press the SELECT or g  
button after step 4.  
Up to 999 scenes can be selected for both disc and card.  
3
4
Hold down the SELECT  
button for at least one  
second:  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
005 / 014  
The selected scene will be  
doubly framed in yellow  
and blue.  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
RAM  
Double frames in  
yellow and blue  
Use the joystick to select  
the last scene in the range  
youwant, andthenpressthe  
A button:  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
m
s
010/ 014  
PLAY  
DESELECT ALL  
RAM  
The thumbnails of scenes in  
the specified range will be  
framed in red, and then  
selected.  
Red  
frame  
Whenscenesuptothis  
point are selected  
98  
Disc Navigation Menu  
Functions Available with Disc Navigation  
Disc Navigation allows you to do the following:  
Reference  
page  
Function  
Disc or card used  
Contents  
Deletion of scenes  
Editing of scenes  
You can delete unnecessary scenes.  
101  
13  
1
You can attach fade and skip to a scene,  
combine scenes, or divide one scene.  
103 - 107  
Scene information  
display  
Youcandisplayinformationononescene  
ormultiplescenes,suchasimagequality,  
recording time, etc.  
112  
123  
Setting of title  
You can set desired titles to play lists and  
programs.  
114, 122  
116  
1
1
Creation of play list  
Disc or card initialization  
You can create an original movie by  
changing the combination of scenes.  
YoucaninitializeaDVD-RAMdiscorcard  
so that it can be used on this DVD Video  
Camera.  
125  
13  
Copy from disc to card  
Disc finalization  
You can copy photos recorded on DVD-  
RAM disc to card.  
108  
127  
1
2
You can use this DVD Video Camera to  
finalize any DVD-R disc recorded on it so  
that the disc can be viewed on DVD  
player, etc.  
Repeat play  
You can repeatedly play back programs  
and scenes.  
128  
12  
Slide show  
You can play back stills continuously.  
129  
124  
3
Remaining capacity  
The remaining recordable movie time or  
number of recordable stills is displayed.  
123  
Disc protection  
Scene lock  
You can protect the DVD-RAM disc to  
prevent deletion or editing by mistake.  
124  
109  
1
You can lock any scene so that it will not  
be deleted by mistake: Essential scenes  
are thereby protected, and recording  
another still is possible.  
3
DPOF setting  
You can set print information.  
110  
3
Note:  
Editing functions (thumbnail, skip, fade) are unique to this DVD Video Camera. When a disc edited on this DVD Video  
Camera is directly played back on a DVD-RAM recorder or read into PC, the editing results will not be reflected in the  
playbackorreading.Toreflecttheeditingresults,connectbothdevicesusingtheAV/Sinput/outputcableandthenperform  
recording (dubbing).  
99  
Understanding Flow of Disc Navigation Menu  
Press the MENU button on the Disc Navigation screen: The menu screens for Disc Navigation and menu screens for  
disc and card will appear.  
See pages 78-79 and 95 for how to interpret the screen.  
Refer to pages indicated for details.  
lWhen using DVD-RAM disc  
Scene  
Delete (P.101)  
Edit  
Thumbnail (P.103)  
Copy (P.108)  
Select (P.111)  
Detail (P.112)  
Skip  
(P.104)  
(P.105)  
(P.106)  
(P.107)  
(P.104)  
Fade  
Combine  
Divide  
Move*  
* Will appear when a play  
list is displayed.  
Start Current (P.111)  
Current End (P.111)  
All  
(P.111)  
Play list  
Program  
Switch (P.117)  
Go To  
Top  
End  
(P.123)  
(P.123)  
Play  
(P.117)  
Create (P.116)  
Edit  
Title  
(P.118 - 121)  
(P.122)  
Disc  
Capacity  
Protect Disc  
Format Disc  
Update Control Info. (P.126)  
(P.124)  
(P.124)  
(P.125)  
Delete (P.122)  
Switch (P.113)  
Play  
Title  
(P.114)  
(P.114)  
Others  
Category  
(P.128)  
Repeat Play (P.128)  
ETC  
lWhen using DVD-R disc  
Scene  
Select (P.111)  
Detail (P.112)  
Start Current (P.111)  
Current End (P.111)  
All  
(P.111)  
Program  
Go To  
Switch (P.113)  
Disc  
Capacity  
Finalize Disc (P.127)  
(P.124)  
Play  
(P.114)  
Others  
ETC  
Repeat Play (P.128)  
Top  
End  
(P.123)  
(P.123)  
lWhen using card  
Scene  
Delete (P.101)  
Lock (P.109)  
DPOF (P.110)  
Select (P.111)  
Detail (P.112)  
Start Current (P.111)  
Current End (P.111)  
All  
(P.111)  
Go To  
Card  
Top  
End  
(P.123)  
(P.123)  
Slide Show  
All  
(P.129)  
DPOF (P.129)  
Capacity  
Format Card  
(P.124)  
(P.125)  
100  
Scene  
13  
Deleting Scenes (Delete)  
You may want to delete unwanted scenes.  
Scenes on DVD-R disc cannot be deleted, and menu item “Delete” will not appear with DVD-R disc.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene to be  
7
Press the g button to quit.  
De  
l
e
t
e
Sc en e  
0 05 / 0 1 3  
All Programs  
0 05 / 0 1 4  
deleted.  
ENTER  
EX I T  
RAM  
Note:  
PLAY  
RAM  
Ifyoupointthecursoratthescenetobedeleted,andthen  
press the DELETE button on remote controller, the  
screen in step 5 will appear.  
Scene to be deleted  
TodeleteanunwantedpartofasceneonDVD-RAMdisc,  
divide the scene first, and then delete the unnecessary  
part (See page 107).  
If you delete all data on disc or card, initializing the disc  
or card is recommended (See page 125).  
If the length of deleted scenes (stills) is quite short, the  
remaining free space of disc may not increase in the disc  
or card remaining capacity indicator.  
The locked scenes on card cannot be deleted (See page  
109).  
If even one play list has been created, message “Same  
scenes on PlayList will be deleted. Delete scenes?” will  
appear before deleting scene(s). This message will  
appearevenifthescene(s)tobedeletedisnotusedinthe  
corresponding play list. In this case, choose “YES” and  
then press the A button.  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Delete” on the  
“Scene” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
l
a
i
l
ETC  
5
The “Delete Scene” screen  
will appear: If you are sure  
you want to delete the  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
selected scene, press the A button.  
If you want to change the scene to be deleted, you can  
change it on this screen.  
6
The screen for verifying  
De  
l
e
t
e
Sc en e  
SEP 30 2004  
Scene No. 005  
deletionwillappear:Choose  
“YES”, and then press the  
A button.  
8
:
00:00AM  
De  
l
e
t
e
sc en e?  
NO  
YES  
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
deletion.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Delete Scene” screen  
will be restored.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to delete other scenes.  
101  
lEditing using submenu  
Press the MENU button before pressing the A button in step 5 (see page 101): The submenu will appear.  
Ed  
i
t
Se  
l
e c  
t
Go To  
E x  
De  
i
l
t
e t e  
S
Cu  
A
t
a
r
l
r
r
t
Cu  
r
r en t  
en t  
End  
To p  
En d  
l
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Edit  
Exit.....................To restore the Disc Navigation screen  
Delete .................To delete selected scenes  
Select  
StartCurrent....To select scenes from the start to the one that the cursor is on at the moment  
CurrentEnd .....To select scenes from the scene the cursor is on to the end  
All.......................To select all scenes  
Go To  
Top......................To move the cursor to the first scene  
End .....................To move the cursor to the last scene  
Pressing the g button will restore the screen in step 5.  
Note:  
Although the submenu screen will appear for each setting, some menu items may not appear, depending on the setting.  
102  
1
Changing Images for Thumbnails (Edit - Thumbnail)  
Normally,thefirstimageoftherecordedsceneisdisplayedasathumbnail:Youcanchooseanotherimageofthescene  
for thumbnail. If you set a vivid image to thumbnail, you can know what you recorded from a glance at the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
Original thumbnail  
You can use this image as thumbnail.  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the thumbnail of the scene to be changed.  
Press the MENU button.  
7
8
The screen for verifying  
switching of thumbnail will  
appear: Choose “YES”, and  
then press the A button.  
Cha ng e Th u  
m
bna  
i
l
Cha ng e t h u  
YES  
m
bna  
i
l
?
NO  
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
switching of thumbnail.  
After Yes or No setting, the “Change Thumbnail”  
screen will be restored.  
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Thumbnail”, and then  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
T h umbna  
Sk  
i
l
press the A button.  
i
p
l
F ad e  
Comb  
Repeat steps 5-7 to change the other scenes.  
a
i
l
i
ne  
ETC  
D i  
RETURN  
v
i
de  
ENTER  
RAM  
Press the g button to quit.  
5
6
The “Change Thumbnail”  
screenwillappear:Ifyouare  
sure you want to change the  
thumbnail of the selected  
scene, presstheAbutton:  
The selected scene will be  
played back.  
Select Thumbnail Point  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 5, the submenu screen will appear. (See  
page 102)  
A thumbnail of still cannot be changed.  
Sincethescenetowhichskippingissetcannotbeplayed  
back, you will not be able to change its thumbnail:  
Release the skip setting of the scene to change the  
thumbnail.  
SEL  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
Ifyouwanttochangethescenewhosethumbnailisto  
be changed, you can change it on this screen.  
When the image you want to use as the thumbnail of  
the scene appears, press the SELECT button.  
103  
1
Playing Back by Skipping Scenes (Edit - Skip)  
You can specify “Skip” for scenes you do not want to play back: The selected scenes will be skipped.  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene to be skipped.  
Press the MENU button.  
6
Press the C button to quit.  
A skip mark “  
” will appear in the thumbnail of  
any scene for which skipping has been set.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
001 / 013  
Skip mark  
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Skip”, and then press the  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
T h umbna  
Sk  
i
l
A button.  
i
p
PLAY  
RAM  
l
F ad e  
Comb  
a
i
l
i
ne  
ETC  
5
The “Set Skip” screen will  
appear: If you are sure you  
want to skip the selected  
scene, press the A button.  
D i  
RETURN  
v
i
de  
ENTER  
RAM  
lReleasing Skip  
Select the scene set to be skipped, and perform the same  
procedure as setting skip: The skip mark will disappear  
and skipping of the scene will be released.  
Ifyouwanttochangethescenetobeskipped,youcan  
change it on this screen.  
After skip setting, the “Set Skip” screen will be  
restored.  
Note:  
Multiple scenes can be selected for skipping (P.98).  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 5, the submenu screen will appear (P.102).  
Repeat step 5 to set skipping of other scenes.  
1
Arranging Order of Scenes (Edit - Move)  
You can arrange scenes within a play listby moving them to desired positions (P.121). Create a play list first, and then  
arrange the scenes [“Creating New Play List (Create)”, P.116].  
104  
1
Directing Scenes Effectively (Edit - Fade)  
You can add fading to the beginning and/or end of scene.  
There are three types of special effects:  
Fade Out  
Fade Out  
Fade Out  
Fade In  
Fade In  
Fade In  
Black:  
Wipe:  
B/W:  
Fades in from black screen  
Fades out to black screen  
Fades in from black screen  
vertically.  
Fades in from Black and White  
screen to color screen  
Fades out vertically from  
screen to black screen  
Fades out from color screen to  
Black and White screen  
1
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene for adding special effects.  
Press the MENU button.  
7
Press the g button to quit.  
2
3
4
The “  
” and/or “  
” mark(s) will appear in the  
scenesforwhichfadeinand/orfadeouthavebeenset.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
005 / 013  
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Fade” and then press the  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu  
Sk  
F ade  
m
p
bna  
i
l
A button.  
i
PLAY  
RAM  
l
a
i
l
Co  
m
v
b
i
i
ne  
ETC  
5
The “Fade” screen will  
appear: If you are sure you  
wanttoaddthe fade effectto  
D
i
de  
“In” effect  
“Out” effect  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
the scene, press the A button.  
If you want to change the scene to which fade is  
added, you can change it on this screen.  
6
Select the special effects for  
“IN” and/or “OUT”, choose  
“Enter”, and then press the  
A button.  
Fa d e  
I N  
None  
OUT  
None  
B l a c k  
B l a c k  
W
W
i
i
pe  
pe  
B / W  
B / W  
En t e r  
Canc e l  
ENTER  
To cancel setting, choose  
“Cancel”.  
After setting, the “Fade” screen will be restored.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add fade to other scenes.  
105  
1
Combining Multiple Scenes (Edit - Combine)  
If you have recorded numerous short scenes, combining them will be facilitated by the use of Disc Navigation.  
Be sure to select consecutive multiple scenes. Combining scenes is possible only when “Category: All” is specified  
(page 128). Stills cannot be combined.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the consecutive multiple scenes to be  
combined.  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Combine” and then press  
the A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu  
Sk  
m
p
bna  
i
l
i
l
Fade  
C o m b i n e  
de  
a
i
l
ETC  
5
The “Combine Scenes”  
screenwillappear:Ifyouare  
sure you want to combine  
D
i
v
i
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
the selected scenes, press the q/h button.  
If you want to change the scenes to be combined, you  
can change them on this screen.  
6
The screen for verifying  
Comb ne Sc e n e s  
i
combination will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the q/h button.  
Comb  
YES  
i
ne s c e n e s ?  
NO  
ENTER  
The two images appearing  
ontheverificationscreenare  
those of the first and last scenes to be combined.  
Choose “NO” to cancel combination.  
AfterYesorNosetting,theCombineScenesscreen  
will be restored.  
The thumbnail of the first scene will appear in the  
combined scene.  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to combine other scenes.  
7
Press the g button to quit.  
Note:  
Scenes in different programs (different recording dates)  
cannot be combined: Create a play list first, and then  
combine such scenes on the play list.  
106  
1
Dividing Movies (Edit - Divide)  
You can divide a scene into two parts.  
To delete unnecessary portion of scene, first divide the scene, and then delete the unnecessary portion.  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene to be divided.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 5, the submenu screen will appear. (P.102)  
The status bar of scene being played back can be  
switched off or on by pressing the DISPLAY button.  
Search and frame advance are useful when designating  
division points.  
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Divide” and then press the  
If a special effect has been added to the original scene,  
the “IN” effect will be added to the first half of scene, and  
the “OUT” effect, to the latter half.  
Thedivisionpointmaydriftbeforeorafter thedesignated  
point by approximately 0.5 seconds.  
Since a scene with a skip set cannot be played back, no  
division point can be specified: Release the skip for the  
scene before dividing it.  
If the division point is at a still, a message will appear, but  
no division will be made.  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu  
Sk  
m
p
bna  
i
l
A button.  
i
l
Fade  
C o m b i n e  
de  
a
i
l
ETC  
5
The “Divide Scene” screen  
will appear: If you are sure  
you want to divide the  
D
i
v
i
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
selected scene, press the A button: The selected  
scene will be played back.  
If the division point is at the start or end of a scene, a  
message will appear, but no division will be made.  
A movie scene whose recording time is 0.5 seconds or  
less cannot be divided.  
If free space available on disc is insufficient, division will  
not be possible: Delete unnecessary scenes.  
Pressing the g button on the verification screen will  
restore the thumbnail display screen.  
Ifyouwanttochange thescenetobedivided, youcan  
change it on this screen.  
The selected scene will be played back.  
6
7
When you reach the point  
whereyouwanttodividethe  
Se l ect D i v i s i o n Po i n t  
002 RAM 0 : 00 : 18  
scene, press the SELECT  
button.  
SEL  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
Status bar of scene  
being played back  
The screen for verifying  
divisionwillappear:Choose  
“YES”, and then press the  
A button.  
D
i
v
i
de Scene  
D
i
v
i
de S cene?  
NO  
YES  
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
division.  
After division, the “Divide Scene” screen will be  
restored.  
Repeat steps 5-7 to divide another scene.  
8
Press the g button to quit.  
107  
1
Copying Stills on DVD-RAM Disc to Card (Copy)  
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “  
” or “  
“.  
Note:  
No movie can be copied.  
When you can copy stills recorded on DVD-RAM disc to  
card, recording quality will automaticallybeset toFINE”.  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear (P.102).  
See “Category” (P.128) to check the stills recorded on  
DVD-RAM disc.  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
Even if all scenes, including movies, are selected to be  
copied, only stills will be copied.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the still to be copied.  
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Copy” on the  
“Scene” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
l
i
e
t
t
e
Data on card cannot be copied to disc.  
Stills recorded on a device other than this DVD Video  
Camera may not be copied normally.  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
a
i
l
ETC  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
6
7
The “Copy to card” screen  
will appear: If you are sure  
you want to copy the  
selected still, press the A  
button.  
Copy t o c a r d  
0 0 3 / 0 1 4  
ENTER  
EX I T  
RAM  
If you want to change the  
still to be copied, you can change it on this screen.  
The screen for verifying  
Copy t o c a r d  
copy will appear: Choose  
“YES”, and then press the  
Copy PHOTO s c e n e s  
t
o
c
a
r
d
?
A button.  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
copy.  
AfterYesorNosetting,theCopytocardscreenwill  
be restored.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to copy other stills to card.  
8
Press the g button to quit.  
108  
3
Locking Scenes on Card (Lock)  
You can lock each photo recorded on card so that it will not be deleted or edited by mistake.  
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “  
”.  
lTo unlock the scene:  
Selectthelockedscene, andthenusethesameprocedure  
as above to unlock the scene: The lock mark will  
disappear and locking will be released.  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene to be locked.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear (P.102).  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
When initializing the card, the locked scenes will also be  
deleted.  
Choose “Lock” on the  
“Scene” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
L o c k  
DPOF  
l
e
t
e
Se  
l
e c t  
De t  
a
i
l
6
The “Lock Set” screen will  
appear: If you are sure you  
want to lock the selected  
scene, press the A button.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Lock Set  
7 / 19  
Lock icon  
ENTER  
EX I T  
If you want to change the scene to be locked, you can  
change it on this screen.  
After setting, the “Lock Set” screen will be restored.  
Repeat step 6 to lock another scene.  
7
Press the g button to quit.  
109  
3
Designating Scenes to be Printed (DPOF)  
You can use DPOF to set print information, including selection of the scenes to be printed, so that you will be able  
to use it on a system conforming to DPOF.  
Note:  
DPOF stands for digital print order format. DPOF is used to ask a print lab to print recorded stills.  
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “  
”.  
7
Use joystick to specify the  
number of prints, and then  
press the A button:  
DPOF Se t  
7 / 19  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scene to which DPOF is to be set.  
Press the MENU button.  
3
Tilt up or right: To increase  
the number by one.  
Tilt down or left: To  
decrease the number by one.  
After setting, the “DPOF Set” screen will be restored.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to set DPOF to another still.  
ENTER  
EX  
I
T
Choose “DPOF” on the  
“Scene” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
L o c k  
DPOF  
Se  
De t  
l
e
t
e
l
e c t  
a
8
Press the g button to quit.  
i
l
6
TheDPOFSet” screenwill  
appear: If you are sure you  
want to set DPOF to the  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 6, the submenu screen will appear (P.102).  
You can also select multiple photos (P.98).  
Ifyouspecifythenumberafterselectingmultiplestills,the  
same specified number will be set to all those stills.  
Up to 99 prints can be set for one scene. The maximum  
number of settable prints on one card is 999.  
This DVD Video Camera may not recognize DPOF that  
has been setonanotherdevice:Alwaysset the DPOF on  
this DVD Video Camera.  
scene, press the A button.  
DPOF Se t  
7 / 19  
6
DPOF icon  
ENTER  
EXIT  
If you wantto change the scene towhich DPOF isset,  
you can change it on this screen.  
110  
123  
Selecting Scenes Using Menu Screen (Select)  
You can use this “Select” function to select consecutive scenes at one time.  
This function is useful when there are numerous scenes.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Choose “Start Current”,  
Sc ene  
“Current End” or “All”  
and then press the A  
button.  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
l
S
Cu  
A
t
a
r
l
r
r
t
Cu  
r
r en t  
a
i
l
en t  
End  
ETC  
Choose “Select” on the “Scene” menu screen.  
l
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
006 / 011  
Current scene  
PLAY  
RAM  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
006 / 011  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
006 / 011  
Al  
l
Pr ogr a  
ms  
006 / 011  
PLAY  
RAM  
PLAY  
RAM  
PLAY  
RAM  
DESELECT ALL  
DESELECT ALL  
DESELECT ALL  
“Start Current” is specified:  
The scenes from the first to  
current will be selected.  
“Current End” is specified:  
The scenes from the current  
to end will be selected.  
“All” is specified:  
Allscenesfromthefirsttoend  
will be selected  
lDeselecting selected scenes  
Deselecting scenes one by one:  
Deselecting all the selected scenes at once:  
While you are displaying the “All Programs” screen on  
which scenes have been selected, press the g button.  
While you are displaying the “All Programs” screen on  
which scenes have been selected, choose the scene to be  
deselected and then press the SELECT button.  
Note:  
Up to 999 scenes can be selected.  
111  
123  
Displaying Information Using Menu Screen (Detail)  
You can display various information for a scene: the recording mode, recording date/time and length, special effects  
and movie quality mode.  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Selectthescenewhoseinformationyouwishtoknow.  
Press the MENU button.  
If you have selected multiple scenes, the information  
shown below will appear.  
Pressing the g button will restore the thumbnail  
display screen.  
(When using disc)  
Choose “Scene”, “Detail”, and then press the A  
button.  
De t a i  
V I DEO  
( XTRA) :  
( F NE) :  
( STD )  
( -  
PHOTO  
l
:
1m  
0m  
1m  
0m  
0m  
0
i
i
i
i
i
n43sec  
0sec  
n43sec  
0sec  
n12sec  
(
(
(
(
(
2s c e n e s )  
0s c e n e s )  
2s c e n e s )  
0s c e n e s )  
2s c e n e s )  
n
I
*1  
:
:
:
n
-
-
)
The detailed information on the scene will appear.  
*2  
*3  
RETURN  
(When using disc)  
(When using card)  
*2  
*3  
*1 With DVD-R disc, the quality mode (FINE, STD or  
LPCM) selected first will appear.  
De  
t
a
i
l
De  
t
a
i
l
Sc e n e N o. 0 0 7  
IDEO (F NE )  
SEP 30 2004  
:O  
Sc e n e N o.  
7
(
V
I
1m i n13 s e c  
00:01AM  
1
0
0
0
0
0
7
1
8
2
8
:
0
)
*2 Number of scenes whose quality mode is unknown:  
This will appear whenthedischasa scenerecorded  
on a device other than this DVD Video Camera, only  
if the disc has a scene whose mode is unknown.  
Also, this will not appear when a DVD-R disc is used.  
*3 This will not appear with DVD-R disc, since no still  
image can be recorded on it.  
Da t  
S k  
e
p
:
8
:
Da t e :SEP 30 2004  
L o c k :O  
DPOF Nu  
00:01AM  
s :  
RETURN  
i
f
f
f
f
*1  
Fa d e IN : None OUT :None  
m
ber o f p r  
NEXT  
i
n
t
6
PREV NEXT RETURN  
PREV  
*1 Not displayed with DVD-R disc.  
*2 May not appear if the loaded card does not  
comply with DCF.  
(When using card)  
*3 Number of pixels on still in horizontal direction:  
This may not appear with a JPEG file that does  
not conform to this DVD Video Camera.  
De t a i  
l
Scene No.  
6
SEP 27 2004 12 : 5 0:01AM  
Scene No.  
7
Note:  
SEP 30 2004  
2
8
: 0 0:01AM  
Tilting the joystick to the right will display information on  
the following scene; tilting the joystick to left will display  
information on the preceding scene.  
S c e n e s :  
RETURN  
5
Press the g button to quit.  
Note:  
Ifmultiplesceneshavebeenselected, thetotalrecording  
timeoftheselectedscenes(totalnumber incaseofstills)  
will appear.  
If a DVD-R disc recorded on a device other than this DVD  
Video Camera is inserted (already finalized), no scene  
information will appear.  
112  
Program  
What is “program”?  
Program refers to an assembly of scenes recorded on the same date regardless of whether they are movie or still.  
Scene No. 1  
Scene No. 2  
Scene No. 3  
Scene No. 4  
Scene No. 5  
Scene No. 6  
9:00AM  
Movie  
11:45AM Still  
1:30PM  
Movie  
5:20PM  
8:00PM  
Movie  
10:20AM  
Still  
Still  
Program No. 1  
Recorded on September 10  
12  
Switching to Thumbnail Display of Specific Date (Switch)  
Since the scenes recorded on this DVD Video Camera are collected as “programs” for each recording date, selecting  
a program will allow you to display only the scenes on a specific date.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
Pressing the g button on the “Switch Program” screen  
will restore the Disc Navigation screen.  
The dates displayed on the program select screen will be  
in the Date Mode used when the firstscenes of programs  
were recorded, and the date displays  
Choose ”Switch” on the  
“Program” menu screen,  
P r og r am  
M/D/Y, D/M/Y and Y/M/D may be mixed.  
and then press the A  
button.  
Sw  
i
t
c h  
P
T
l
i
a y  
t
l
e
ETC  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
4
Select the program to be  
displayed, and then press  
the A button.  
Sw  
i
t
c h P r og r a  
m
A
l
l
Pr og r  
a
ms  
01 AUG 3 0 2004  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 3 0 2004  
The Disc Navigation screen  
of the selected program will  
appear.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
03 S E P 30 2004  
001 / 008  
PLAY  
RAM  
113  
12  
Playing Back Program (Play)  
You can play back only the selected program.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Select the program to be played back, and then press  
the A button.  
Playback will start from the first scene of the selected  
program.  
Choose “Play” on the  
“Program” menu screen,  
P r og r am  
S
t
a
r
t
P r og r a  
m
and then press the A  
button.  
Sw  
i
t
c h  
P
T
l
i
a y  
t
l
e
A
l
l
P r o g r a m s  
ETC  
01 AUG 3 0 2004  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 3 0 2004  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
8
: 00AM  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SEP 30 2004  
Note:  
If “Repeat Play: On” is specified, the selected program will  
be repeatedly played back (see page 128).  
1
Changing Title of Program (Title)  
The recording date/time is automatically attached to a programs as its title.  
You can change the recording date/time to any desired title.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
Selectaletterandthenpress  
the A button: The  
selected letter will be  
entered.  
Title input bar  
T I T L E  
SEP 3 0 2004  
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
É
Ë
8
H
U
Í
9
I
V
Ó
Ö
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE  
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
Choose “Title” on the “Program” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Repeat this procedure to  
create a title.  
Î
Ï
1
Enter  
DELETE  
Cancel  
SELECT  
SEL  
INPUT  
4
Select the program whose  
titleyouwanttochange,and  
P r og r a  
m
T
i
t
l
e
Input mode  
then press the A button.  
01 AUG 3 0 2004  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 3 0 2004  
04 NON 1 0 2004  
Palette for selecting  
characters  
The screen for setting a title  
will appear.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
114  
6
7
After entering the title,  
choose “Enter” and then  
press the A button.  
lCharacters available for entering  
title  
You can use the joystick to select characters from the  
“capital letter”, “small letter” and “symbol” input  
modes.  
Withstep5,selecttheinputmodeandthenpresstheA  
button, or press the DISPLAY button.  
T I T L E  
a
t
a
Pa r k  
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
6
f
s
á
ä
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE  
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
y
ñ
ß
î
ï
2
Enter  
Cancel  
SELECT  
SEL  
ENTER  
DELETE  
The screen for verifying the  
change in title will appear:  
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
T I T L E  
a
n
t
i
a
h
Pa  
r
k
Input mode  
F
i
s
t
i
t
l
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g ?  
T I T L E SEP 3 0 2004  
T I T L E  
SEP 3 0 2004  
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
6
f
s
á
ä
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE  
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
É
Ë
8
H
U
Í
9
I
V
Ó
Ö
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE  
YES  
NO  
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
y
ñ
ß
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
changing of the title.  
Î
Ï
î
ï
1
Enter  
DELETE  
Cancel  
SELECT  
2
Enter  
DELETE  
Cancel  
SELECT  
SEL  
SEL  
CHANGE  
CHANGE  
AfterYesorNosetting,theDiscNavigationscreenof  
the selected program will appear.  
Note:  
Ifyou wishtodelete aletter inthe title, presstheg button  
once:Theinputletterwillbedeleted. Holdingdowntheg  
button will delete all letters in the TITLE column.  
YoucanalsousetheDELETEbuttononremotecontroller  
to delete any input letters.  
T I T L E  
SEP 3 0 2004  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
SPACE  
3
Enter  
DELETE  
Cancel  
SELECT  
SEL  
CHANGE  
PressingtheSELECTbuttononthetitlesettingscreen(in  
step 5) will change the cursor position from the title input  
bar to character select palette, input mode number, and  
then to “Cancel”.  
To cancel the setting of title, choose “NO” on the screen  
for verifying the entered title: The screen for verifying  
cancellation of title setting will appear. To cancel title  
setting, choose “YES”.  
If you press the g button on the screen for verifying  
change in title, the title setting screen will be restored.  
Double byte characters set on other devices may be  
displayed blank on this DVD Video Camera.  
115  
1
Play List  
What is “Play List”?  
You can create a play list on this DVD Video Camera by gathering your favorites from the recorded scenes.  
Since the play list is not created by copying data, you will consume little of the disc capacity by making a play list.  
On the other hand, deleting scenes on play list will not increase the remaining disc capacity for recording.  
Example:  
Program 1 (recorded on September 27, 2004)  
Program 2 (recorded on September 30, 2004)  
Play list 1 created  
Play lists of up to No. 99 can be created and 999 scenes can be included in play lists of No. 1 to No. 99.  
Creating New Play List (Create)  
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Select the scenes to be programmed in a play list.  
Press the MENU button.  
6
When creation of a play list is complete, the Disc  
Navigation screen will appear.  
Note:  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
If the added scene had skip or fade set, that information  
will also be added to the play list.  
Choose “Create” on the  
P
l
a y L  
i
s
t
The date/time when a play list was created will appear as  
the title for the play list.  
“PlayList” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
S
P
w
l
i
t
c h  
ay  
C r e a t  
Ed  
T
De  
ENTER  
e
If free space available on disc is insufficient, creation of  
new play list may not be possible: Delete unnecessary  
scenes.  
Only the data on scenes is recorded in play list: If you  
create or delete play lists, the original scenes in  
programs will not be erased.  
Editing scenes on play list will not affect the scenes in  
programs.  
If you press the MENU button before pressing A in  
step 5, the submenu will appear (see page 102).  
i
t
l
t
l
e
i
e
t
ETC  
e
RETURN  
RAM  
5
The scene select screen  
will appear: If the selected  
scenes on the play list are  
the ones you want, press  
the A button.  
0 5 SEP 30 2004 8 : . . 006 / 006  
If you want to change the  
scenes with which you  
want to create a play list,  
you can change them on  
this screen.  
PLAY  
RAM  
With the created play list, you can also add scenes  
recordedonanotherdayordeleteunnecessaryscenes  
afterwards.  
116  
Switching to Display of Each Play List (Switch)  
Select the desired play list: The Disc Navigation screen of the selected play list will appear.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Use the “Switch Playlist”  
screen to select the play list  
youwishtodisplay,andthen  
press the A button.  
0 1 AUG 30 2004 1 2 : . . 001 / 008  
Choose “Switch” on the  
P l a y L  
i
s
t
PLAY  
RAM  
“PlayList” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
The Disc Navigation screen  
of the selected play list will  
be displayed.  
Sw  
i
t
c h  
P
l
a y  
C r e a t e  
Ed  
i
t
t
l
e
T
i
e
ETC  
D e l  
ENTER  
t e  
RETURN  
RAM  
Note:  
TodisplaytheDiscNavigationscreenshowingallprograms  
(all recorded scenes), choose “All Programs” on the  
“Switch PlayList” screen.  
Sw  
i
t
c h  
P
l
l a y L  
i
s
t
A
l
Pr og r  
a
ms  
01 AUG 3 0 2004 12  
:
:
:
3 0PM  
0 0AM  
3 0AM  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
8
03 SEP 1 2 2004  
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
lEditing on play list  
When adjusting settings on play list, such as changing  
title, adding fade, setting skip, etc., use the same  
procedure for adjusting program or scene settings.  
Perform these settings, referring to the following  
reference pages:  
Changing thumbnail,  
Setting skip,  
Adding fade,  
Combining scenes,  
Dividing a scene,  
Arranging order of scenes,  
Changing title,  
P.103  
P.104  
P.105  
P.106  
P.107  
P.121  
P.122  
Playing Back a Play List (Play)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Use the “Start Playlist”  
screen to select the play list  
to be played back, and then  
press the A button.  
Choose “Play” on the  
“PlayListmenuscreen,and  
then press the A button.  
12  
:
30PM  
P l a y L  
i
s
Sw  
t
AUG 30 2004  
The selected playlist will be  
played back from the first  
scene. To cancel playback midway, press the g  
button: The Disc Navigation screen of the play list  
being played back will appear.  
i
t
c h  
P
l
a y  
C r e a t e  
Ed  
i
t
T
i
t
l
e
e
ETC  
D e l  
ENTER  
t e  
RETURN  
RAM  
Note:  
If “Repeat Play On” is specified, the play list will be  
repeatedly played back (See page 128).  
S
t
a
r
t
P
l a y L  
i
s
t
01 AUG 3 0 2004 12  
:
:
:
:
3 0PM  
0 0AM  
3 0AM  
1 5PM  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 1 2 2004  
04 SEP 2 0 2004  
8
9
3
ENTER  
RETURN  
117  
Adding Scenes to Play List (Editing Play List)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
Tilt the joystick down to move the cursor to the lower  
row, andtiltitleftorrighttoselectthepointwherethe  
scene is to be inserted.  
Choose “Edit” on the  
“PlayListmenuscreen,and  
then press the A button.  
P l a y L  
i
s
Sw  
t
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
A
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
i
t
c h  
P
l
a y  
C r e a t e  
Scene to be added  
Insertion position  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o .  
0
1
Ed  
i
t
T
i
t
l
e
e
ETC  
D e l  
ENTER  
t e  
RETURN  
RAM  
ADD  
EX I T  
4
Use the play list select  
screen to select the play list  
to which you wish to add  
scenes, and then press the  
A button.  
*1 *2  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a y L  
i
s
t
*1: Number of scene before insertion position cursor  
*2: Total number of scenes on play list  
01 AUG 3 0 2004 12  
:
:
:
:
3 0PM  
0 0AM  
3 0AM  
1 5PM  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 1 2 2004  
04 SEP 2 0 2004  
8
9
3
6
Tilt the joystick up to move the cursor to the upper  
row, and tilt it left or right to point the cursor to the  
scene to be added.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
The scenes of the program  
that was displayed in step 1  
willappearintheupperrow,  
and the scenes of selected  
play list will appear in the  
lower row.  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
7
8
Press the A button to copy the scene.  
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
After adding scenes is completed, the edited play list  
will appear.  
Repeat steps 5-7 to add other scenes.  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o . 0 1  
ADD  
EXIT  
Press the g button: The screen verifying exit from  
editing will appear.  
Note:  
If the DISPLAY button is  
pressed when the  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
thumbnailsaredisplayed,the  
recording date/time of the  
selected scene will appear  
across the bottom of screen.  
Press DISPLAY again to  
restore the previous screen.  
Note:  
The cursor shows the position where the scene is to be  
added.  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o . 0 1  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
Pressing the g button in the middle of adding scenes will  
display the screen for verifying an exit from “Edit  
PlayList”.ChooseYEStoexitplaylistediting.Choosing  
“NO” will restore the “Edit PlayList” screen.  
If you press the MENU button in step 5 or 6, the submenu  
screen for editing play list will appear. You can also use  
this submenu to add scenes (See page 102).  
AUG 3 0 2004 1 2  
:
3 0 0 1PM  
:
Recording date/time  
118  
Deleting Scenes from Play List (Editing Play List)  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
4
Press the A button.  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
Displaytheeditingscreenof  
the play list to be edited.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to  
delete other scenes.  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 02  
EX I T  
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
DELETE  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
N
o .  
0
2
Perform steps 24 on  
5
Press the g button: The  
screen for verifying exit  
from editing will appear.  
page 118.  
DELETE  
EX I T  
3
Move the cursor to the play  
list in lower row, and place the cursor on the scene to  
be deleted.  
Note:  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
Place the cursor on scene to be deleted, and then press  
the DELETE button on remote controller.  
Adding Scenes Using Submenu for Editing (Editing Play List)  
You can use the menu screen to add scenes to a play list.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Display the editing screen of the play list to be edited.  
Perform steps 24 on page 118.  
5
6
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Add”, and then  
press the A button.  
Ed  
i
t
a ms  
Ex  
Add  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
i
t
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 0  
3
Repeat steps 3-6 to add  
other scenes.  
3
4
From the play list in lower row, select the position  
where you wish to insert a scene.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
7
Press the g button: The  
screen verifying exit from  
editing will appear.  
Select the scenes to be added from the upper row.  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
A
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 8 / 0 0 8  
Ed  
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL  
P r o g r ams  
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 03  
Scene to be  
added  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 03  
ADD  
EX I T  
Insertion  
position  
ADD  
EX I T  
Note:  
The selected scenes will be added in the insertion  
position.  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
119  
Deleting Scenes Using Submenu for Editing (Editing Play List)  
You can delete scenes from play list on the editing screen.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Displaytheeditingscreenof  
5
Choose “Delete” on the  
“Edit” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Ed  
i
t
s  
Ex  
De l e t e  
0 0 1 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
i
t
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
P
l
a yL No .  
i
s
t
0
4
the play list to be edited.  
A
l
l
P r o g r a ms  
0 0 1 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
Repeat steps 3-5: other  
scenes can be deleted.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No .  
0
4
Perform steps 24 on  
page 118.  
ADD  
EX I T  
6
Press the g button: The screen verifying exit from  
editing will appear.  
3
4
Move the cursor to the play  
list in lower row.  
Note:  
If all scenes on play list are deleted, the play list itself will  
also be deleted.  
Select the scene to be deleted, and then press the  
MENU button.  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
Selecting Scenes Using Submenu for Editing (Editing Play List)  
You can specify the range of scenes when adding or deleting consecutive multiple scenes to/from play list. This  
“Select” menu item is useful when selecting consecutive multiple scenes in items for adding or deleting scenes using  
menu on page 111.  
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Displaytheeditingscreenof  
4
Choose “Start Current”,  
“Current End”, “All” on  
the “Select” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
S e  
l
e c t  
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
S
t
a
r
r
r
t
Cu  
r
r en t  
Cu  
a
en t  
End  
Ed  
i
t
P
l a yL  
i
s
t
P
l
l
A
the play list to be edited.  
A
l
l
P r o g r ams  
0 0 4 / 0 1 4  
0 0 7 / 0 0 7  
ENTER  
RETURN  
P
l
a yL  
i
s
t
No . 04  
Perform steps 24 on  
page 118.  
Note:  
ADD  
EX I T  
See page 111 for the status of scenes to be selected.  
3
Specify the first scene of  
those you wish to select, and then press the MENU  
button.  
5
Press the g button: The screen verifying exit from  
editing will appear.  
Note:  
You can also select multiple scenes (P.98).  
120  
Arranging Order of Scenes (Move)  
You can move scenes only when “Category: All” is specified.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
9
The screen for verifying  
move will appear: Choose  
“YES”, and then press the  
A button.  
Move Scene  
Move sc e n e s?  
YES NO  
Choose “Switch” onthePlayListmenu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
ENTER  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
move.  
4
Select the scene to be moved, and then press the A  
button.  
AfterYesorNosetting,thesceneselectscreenwillbe  
restored.  
Repeat steps 7 - 9 to move another scene.  
5
6
Press the MENU button.  
10Press the g button to quit.  
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,  
“Move”, and then press the  
A button.  
Sc ene  
De  
Ed  
Copy  
Se e c t  
De t  
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu  
Sk  
F ade  
m
p
bna  
i
l
Note:  
i
If you press the MENU button before pressing the A  
button in step 7, the submenu screen will appear.  
You can also move multiple scenes (P.98).  
Stills can also be moved.  
l
Co  
m
v
b
i
i
ne  
a
i
l
D
M
i
de  
ETC  
7
The “Move Scene” screen  
will appear: If you are sure  
you want to move the scene,  
press the A button.  
o v e  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Only scenes on play list can be moved.  
If you want to change the scene to be moved, you can  
change it on this screen.  
8
Move the “ ” mark to the  
Se  
l
e c t  
I
n s e r t P o  
i
n
t
0 06 / 0 1 9  
position where you wish to  
move the scene, and then  
press the A button.  
ENTER  
EXIT  
RAM  
121  
Changing Title of Play List (Title)  
The play lists have serial numbers based on the order in which you have created them, along with the created dates/  
times: You can change these titles at any time.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
The screen verifying exit  
from this menu will appear:  
Choose “YES” and then  
press the A button.  
T I T L E  
a
n
t
a
Pa  
r
k
F
i
i
s
h
t
i
t
l
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g ?  
YES  
NO  
Choose “Title” on the “PlayList” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
ENTER  
6
Press the g button to quit.  
4
Use the “Playlist Title” screen to select the play list  
whose title you wish to change, and then press the  
A button.  
0 1  
a
t
a
Pa  
r
k
001 / 008  
After changing the title, the  
Disc Navigation screen for  
the play list whose title has  
been changed will appear.  
See “Changing Title of  
PLAY  
RAM  
P
l a y L  
i
s
t
T i  
t
l
e
Program (Title)” on  
page 114 for how to enter a  
title.  
01 AUG 3 0 2004 12  
:
:
:
:
3 0PM  
0 0AM  
3 0AM  
1 5PM  
Note:  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 1 2 2004  
04 SEP 2 0 2004  
8
9
3
The registered title can be changed at any time using the  
same procedure.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Deleting Play List (Delete)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
Thescreenforverifyingdeletionwillappear:Choose  
“YES”, and then press the A button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel deletion.  
After Yes or No setting, the Disc Navigation screen  
for all programs will be restored.  
Choose “Delete” on the “PlayList” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
4
Use the “Delete PlayList”  
Note:  
De  
l
e
t
e
P
l a y L  
i
s
t
screen to select the play list  
you wish to delete, and then  
press the A button.  
Even if you delete a play list, the original scenes stored on  
disc will not be deleted.  
01 AUG 3 0 2004 12  
:
:
:
:
3 0PM  
0 0AM  
3 0AM  
1 5PM  
02 SEP 1 0 2004  
03 SEP 1 2 2004  
04 SEP 2 0 2004  
8
9
3
ENTER  
RETURN  
De  
l
e
t
e
P
P
l
l
a y L  
a y L  
i
i
s
s
t
t
No. 01  
AUG 30 2004 1 2 : 30P  
M
De  
YES  
l
e
t
e
P
l
a y L  
NO  
i
s
t
?
ENTER  
122  
123  
Go To  
From the Disc Navigation screen, you can jump to the first scene or last scene.  
Top (End)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “Top” or “End” on  
Go To  
the “Go To” menu screen,  
and then press the A  
button.  
To p  
En d  
ETC  
ENTER  
RETURN  
RAM  
Al  
l
Pr ogr ams  
014 / 014  
PLAY  
RAM  
(When “End” is specified)  
123  
Disc or Card Management  
123  
Verifying Remaining Free Space on Disc or Card (Capacity)  
You can find out how long you will be able to record on one side of disc or on card.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Press the g button to quit.  
The Disc Navigation screen will be restored.  
Choose “Capacity” on the “Disc” or “Card” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
Note:  
With a write-protected (see “Terminology” on page 148)  
disc or locked card, the remaining space will always be  
displayed as “0”.  
(When using disc)  
(When using card)  
Cap a c  
A p p r o x .  
V I DEO( XTRA) : 17  
V I DEO( F NE) : 26  
i
t
y
Cap a c  
A p p r o x .  
PHOTO( FINE) : 462  
PHOTO( NORM) : 924  
PHOTO( ECO) : 1148  
i
t
y
m
m
m
i
i
i
n
n
n
I
*1  
*2  
V I DEO( STD)  
PHOTO  
:
54  
: 996  
9 0%  
Cap a c  
i
t
y
: 9 6%  
Cap a c  
i
t
y
:
RETURN  
RETURN  
*1 With DVD-R disc: The quality mode first used for  
recording with disc will appear.  
*2 With DVD-R disc: This will not be displayed.  
1
Protecting Disc from Writing (Protect Disc)  
YoucanprotectaDVD-RAMdiscinordertopreventrecordedimagesfrombeingerasedoreditedbymistake.Further  
recording will not be possible on protected disc until the protection is released.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel  
protection.  
After “YES” or “NO”  
setting, the Disc  
Navigation screen will be  
restored.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
001 / 019  
Choose “Protect Disc” on  
D i s c  
PLAY  
RAM  
the “Disc” menu screen, and  
then press the A button.  
Ca pac  
P r t e c  
Fo rma  
Upd a t e Con t r o l  
ENTER RETURN  
i
t y  
t
D
Disc protect icon  
o
D
i
i
s
sc  
c
Note:  
To release disc protection,  
t
ETC  
I
n f o.  
RAM  
perform the same procedure as above: The screen for  
verifying the release of protection will appear.  
Choose “YES” to release the protection.  
4
The screen for verifying  
protection will appear:  
P r o t e c t D i s c  
W r i t e p r o t e c t d i s c ?  
Choose “YES”, and then  
YES  
NO  
press the A button.  
ENTER  
124  
13  
Initializing DVD-RAM Disc or Card (Format Disc. Format Card)  
Take great care that power is not turned off during initialization: If the DVD  
Video Camera is turned off during initialization and the initialization is  
interrupted, incorrect initialization will result, and at worst, the data  
recorded on disc or card may be damaged.  
Before You Begin  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
Initialization will delete all the recorded contents on disc  
or card: Be careful not to delete data by mistake.  
Be sure to use the AC adaptor when initializing disc or  
card so that the DVD Video Camera is not turned off  
midway. Ifinitializationisinterruptedbypowerturningoff,  
thediscorcardwillnotbeinitializedcorrectly, oritmaybe  
damaged.  
Choose “Format Disc” or “Format Card” on the  
“Disc” or “Card” menu screen, and then press the  
A button.  
It may not be possible to initialize a disc with many  
scratches or dirt: Such a disc cannot be used.  
Ifyouuseabrand-newDVD-Rdisc, messageDiscisnot  
formatted” will appear: Initialize the disc, following the  
subsequent messages (See page 47).  
This DVD Video Camera may not recognize some discs  
orcardsthathavebeeninitializedonPCoradeviceother  
than this DVD Video Camera.  
The screen for verifying “Format Disc” or “Format  
Card” will appear.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then press the A button.  
Choose “NO” to cancel initialization.  
If you attempt to initialize a disc or card in this DVD Video  
Camera when it is connected to PC via USB cable, the  
disc or card may not be initialized and may be unusable  
on this DVD Video Camera.  
F o r  
m
A
a t D i s c  
F o r  
m
A
a t Ca r d  
l
l
d a t a  
w
i
l
d
l
i
b e d e l e t e d .  
l
l
d a t a  
w
i
l
l
b e d e l e t e d .  
F o r  
m
a t t h e  
s
c
no  
w
?
F o r  
m
a t t h e ca r d no  
w
?
YES  
NO  
YES  
NO  
ENTER  
ENTER  
(When using  
DVD-RAM disc)  
(When using card)  
When initializing one side ofthe disc is complete, the  
DVD Video Camera will return to recording pause  
mode.  
125  
1
Updating Control Information of DVD-RAM Disc (Update Control Info.)  
Disc Navigation in this DVD Video Camera handles information on scenes, such as skip or fade, in a particular  
manner. If you use another device to edit a disc recorded onthis DVD Video Camera, and then use the data again with  
Disc Navigation in this DVD Video Camera, the Disc Navigation may not appear normally. If this happens, use the  
Update Control Info function to update the data.  
Use the AC adaptor to power the DVD Video Camera for updating control  
information, and make sure that power is not turned off during updating:  
If the DVD Video Camera is turned off during updating and the updating  
Before You Begin  
is interrupted, the control information will not be updated correctly.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
Press the g button to quit.  
Note:  
Be sure to use the AC adaptor when updating the control  
information so that the DVD Video Camera is not turned  
off midway. If updating of control information is  
interrupted by power off, the control information will not  
be updated correctly.  
Choose “Update Control Info.” on the “Disc” menu  
screen, and then press the A button.  
The screen for verifying “Update Control Info.” will  
appear.  
It may take time to update the control information if the  
disc has many recorded scenes.  
Pressing the g button on the verification screen will  
restore the thumbnail display screen.  
4
Choose “YES”, and then  
press the A button.  
Upda te Con  
t
r
o
l
I
n
o
f o.  
Upda te Con  
YES  
t
r
l
I
n
f o?  
Themessageforproceeding  
will appear, and then the  
Disc Navigation menu  
screen will be restored.  
NO  
ENTER  
A black screen may appear while the message for  
updating is displayed.  
Choose “NO” to cancel updating.  
126  
2
Finalizing DVD-R Disc (Finalize Disc)  
Be sure to use the AC adaptor to power the DVD Video Camera when  
finalizing a DVD-R disc. Finalization cannot be executed using a battery  
pack. If the DVD Video Camera is turned off during finalization and the  
finalization is interrupted, incorrect finalization will result, and at worst, the  
disc may be damaged.  
Before You Begin  
If you want to play back a DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD Video Camera, by using a device that plays an  
8 cm DVD-R disc - such as a DVD player, etc. - you must finalize the disc on this DVD Video Camera.  
The finalized DVD-R disc can be played on a DVD player, as “DVD Video”: The date of program will appear on the  
menu screen of DVD player as a title.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
5
When finalization is complete, the Disc Navigation  
screen for all programs will appear.  
SELECT I TEM  
001 / 010  
Choose “Finalize Disc” on the “Disc” menu screen,  
and then press the A button.  
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
S E P  
S E P  
S E P  
OC T  
OC T  
1
1
1
0
5
8
8
0
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
1
6
7
8
9
0
:
:
:
:
:
NO V  
NO V  
NO V  
D E C  
D E C  
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
1
The disc will be finalized.  
TOP  
PREV  
NEXT  
END  
4
Choose “YES”, and then  
F i n a l i z e D i s c  
(Screen when viewed  
using DVD player)  
press the A button.  
F u r t h e r r e c o r d i n g o n t h i s  
d i s c w i l l b e i m p o s s i b l e .  
F i n a l i z e ? ( A p p o r o x . 2 3 m i n . )  
YES  
NO  
Important Note:  
ENTER  
Do not finalize a disc recorded on this DVD Video  
Camera using any other device.  
No recording can be done on any DVD-R disc that has  
The message showing that  
the disc is being finalized  
will appear, and the disc will  
then be finalized.  
will appear on the Disc  
Navigation screen for a  
finalized disc.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
m
s
001/ 015  
been finalized.  
If the disc in the DVD Video Camera has already been  
finalized, you cannot choose “Finalize Disc”.  
Be sure to use the AC adaptor when finalizing disc.  
Finalization cannot be executed using a battery pack. If  
finalizationisinterruptedbypowerturningoff,thediscwill  
not be finalized correctly, or it may be damaged.  
The time required to finalize the disc that appears on the  
“Finalize Disc” screen is only for reference.  
The shorter the recording time on disc, the longer it will  
take to finalize it.  
PLAY  
Finalized DVD-R disc  
127  
1
Other Functions (Others)  
Displaying Movies or Stills Independently (Category)  
Scenes recorded on this DVD Video Camera will be displayed in the order of recording regardless of whether they  
are movies or stills. You can use the Disc Navigation screen to switch this display to stills only or movies only.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
4
Specify the desired option  
for display, and then press  
the A button.  
Al  
l
Pr og r a  
ms  
006/ 015  
Choose “Category” on the  
O t h e r s  
“Others” menu screen, and  
PLAY  
RAM  
then press the A button.  
(When “PHOTO” is  
specified)  
A l  
V I DEO  
l
C a t e g o r y  
R e p e a t P l a y  
ENTER  
PHOTO  
RAM  
RETURN  
All:  
Todisplayallscenes,moviesorstills,inthe  
order of recording.  
VIDEO: To display only movies in the order of  
recording.  
PHOTO: To display only photos in the order of  
recording.  
12  
Playing Back Scenes Repeatedly (Repeat Play)  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
lWhen Repeat Play is set  
If one scene has been specified: When playback of the  
last scene is finished, playback of all scenes will repeat  
from the first scene.  
Ifthe rangefor playback has been specified:Playback of  
the scenes in that range will repeat.  
Choose “Repeat Play” on the  
O t h e r s  
“Others” menu screen , and  
then press the A button.  
lTo release Repeat Play  
Use one of the following 3 methods to release:  
Choose “Off” in step 4 above.  
Turn the DVD Video Camera off once.  
Press the DISC EJECT lever to remove the disc.  
C a t e g o r y  
On  
4
ChooseOn”,andthenpress  
the A button: Playback  
will start.  
R e p e a t P l a y  
ENTER  
O
f
f
RAM  
RETURN  
Choose “Off” to cancel Repeat Play Setting.  
Note:  
Press the g button to terminate playback. However, the  
Repeat Play setting will not be cancelled.  
Still images can also be played back repeatedly.  
Repeat playback will not function when playback is set  
from the recording pause status.  
128  
3
Slide Show (Continuous Playback of Stills)  
If you play back stills recorded on a card, the DVD Video Camera will enter playback pause mode after each still is  
played back.  
Setting Slide Show allows you to continuously play back stills.  
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Press the MENU button.  
Note:  
One still is played for approx. 5 seconds.  
Withslideshow, playbackstartsfromthefirststilloncard.  
If you press the g button or turn the DVD Video Camera  
off, Slide Show will be canceled.  
Choose “Slide Show”,  
S l i d e S h o w  
“All” or “DPOF”, and then  
press the A button.  
A l  
l
DPOF  
All:  
To play all stills  
recorded on card  
in slide show.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
DPOF: ToplayonlystillstowhichDPOFhasbeen  
set in slide show.  
When playback is finished, the DVD Video Camera  
will enter the playback pause mode at the final still.  
Pressing the g button will restore the Disc  
Navigation screen.  
129  
Installing Software  
Before installing the DVD-RAM driver on the CD-ROM provided with this DVD Video Camera, make sure  
that another DVD-RAM driver has not already been installed in your PC.  
If another DVD-RAM driver has already installed in your PC, confirm the original DVD-RAM driver.  
If the packet writing software which supports the DVD-RAM disc is installed, it is necessary to un-install  
it, and then install the provided DVD-RAM driver.  
Note:  
®
This guide uses the screen of Windows XP Home Edition/XP Professional to explain installing software: Use the same  
®
procedure for Windows 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional to install the DVD-RAM driver.  
We will not guarantee proper operation of this DVD Video Camera if you use software other than that supplied with this  
product to read/write data to the DVD Video Camera even though reading/writing of a file has finished without errors.  
Compatible PC for use with DVD Video Camera:  
VDR-M50PP/VDR-M70PP  
Personal computer : IBM PC/AT compatible computer  
OS  
: Windows® 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP Home Edition/  
XP Professional  
CPU  
: Pentium® III 450 MHz or faster or Celeron® 633 MHz or faster  
(Pentium® 4, 1.2 GHz or faster is recommended.)  
This unit may not be operated with a Pentium® compatible CPU not made by Intel® or  
AMD®.  
This unit also may not be operated with AMD-K6®-2/AMD-K6®-III.  
: 128 MB or more  
Memory  
Free disk space  
: 400 MB or more (not including the space in which images and stills are copied and edited)  
Display resolution : 1024 × 768 pixels or more  
Display mode  
: High Color (16 bit), 65,536 colors or more (Display adapter supported by DirectX® 8.1,  
video memory ; 4 MB or more.)  
Sound card  
USB  
: This unit requires sound card supported by DirectSound®.  
: This unit requires one USB port (USB 2.0 HIGH-SPEED port is recommended).  
Operations will not be guaranteed under the following  
conditions  
The OS other than Windows® 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP Home Edition/  
XP Professional is installed.  
Operating computer using Pentium® compatible CPU not made by Intel® or AMD®.  
Connecting this unit to your computer through a USB hub.  
Connecting this unit to your computer without the provided USB Cable and 5 pin Mini USB Cable, type  
B(Optional-user provided).  
Connecting USB equipment other than the keyboard, the mouse and this unit to your computer.  
This unit does not support multiprocessors.  
Insomecases, defectsorlimitationsmayoccurdependingonthecombinationsofothersoftwareordevicesdespite  
the fact that your computer satisfies the conditions described above.  
Note:  
Depending on the condition of your PC, it may take a long time to install the software.  
130  
Contents on Provided CD-ROM  
Upon inserting the provided CD-ROM into the PC, the “Setup Menu” screen will appear. You can install the  
included software.  
If the “Setup Menu” screen does not appear, double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
lUSB Driver  
Note:  
If any trouble has occured while installing USB driver  
or DVD-RAM driver :  
(Using other than Windows 98 Second Edition/Me)  
When “Driver Signing” is selected in the “Hardware” tab in  
“System Properties”, the installation procedure will not be  
completed. Select “Warn” and try again.  
(see page 133 for installation)  
®
Install this driver when using the provided USB cable to  
connect this DVD Video Camera to PC.  
Be sure you do not connect the USB cable before  
installing the USB driver.  
Tocheckandchangethesetting,openControlPanelfrom  
theWindowsStartmenuselect,SystemProperties”,and  
then click the “Hardware” tab.  
lDVD-RAM Driver  
(see page 135 for installation)  
Install this driver if you wish to use JPEG stills recorded  
on a DVD-RAM disc, on your PC.  
lDVD-MovieAlbumSE 3  
(see page 138 for installation)  
You can use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to edit the images  
recorded on a DVD-RAM disc and create a 3D title.  
Click  
lMyDVD 4.0  
(see page 140 for installation).  
You can use MyDVD to create a DVD-Video disc from  
movies edited on DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
lAcrobat Reader  
If Acrobat Reader is not installed in your PC, you will  
need to install it in order to open the on-line manuals  
(instructionmanualfiles)forDVD-MovieAlbumSEand  
DVD-RAM driver.  
Confirm  
131  
Read the electronic instruction manuals (on-line manuals) on PC for complete information on using each  
software program.  
lDVD-MovieAlbumSE  
lDVD-RAM Driver  
You can read the instruction manual using either of the  
following procedures:  
After installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE, open  
“Programs”or “All Programs” from the Windows  
“Start” menu, choose “Panasonic” and “DVD-  
MovieAlbumSE”, and then open “On-line Manual”.  
After installing the DVD-RAM Driver, open  
“Programs” or “All Programs” from the Windows  
“Start” menu, choose “Panasonic DVD-RAM” and  
“DVD-RAM Driver”, and then open “Using DVD-  
RAM disc”.  
No electronic instruction manual is provided with the  
USB Driver.  
To read the above manual, you will need Adobe Acrobat  
Reader.  
If Adobe Acrobat Reader has not been installed in your  
PC, you can install it from the "Setup Menu"  
screen. Click any language from the "Acrobat Reader"  
on the "Setup Menu" screen.  
Note:  
Although the above software programs can be used on  
®
Windows 98 Second Edition or later is needed to fully  
utilize all functions of DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
lMyDVD  
After installing MyDVD, open “Programs” or “All  
Programs” from the Windows “Start” menu, choose  
“Sonic” and “MyDVD”, and then open the electronic  
instruction manual in “Documentation” folder.  
To read the above manual, a Web browser (Internet  
Explorer, Netscape Communicator, etc.) must be set up  
in your PC.  
If you cannot open the electronic instruction manual for  
MyDVD, consult the manufacturer of your PC about the  
setup method for the Web browser.  
132  
Installing USB Driver  
Use the following procedure to install the USB Driver. The following instructions are an example for installing the  
USB driver from the supplied CD-ROM. It is necessary to repeat steps 6-9 for using the card (Select “  
“ in step 6).  
1
Insert the provided CD-ROM into the PC, and Click  
“USB Driver” on the “Setup Menu” screen.  
5
Click “Quit”.  
If the “Setup Menu” screen does not appear, double-  
click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
2
The driver setup screen will appear: Click the “USB  
Driver Installation” button.  
Click  
6
Set the power switch of DVD Video Camera to  
“, and then use the provided USB cable to  
connect the DVD Video Camera to the USB port of  
PC.  
The "Found New Hardware" icon will appear.  
Click  
When using OS other than Windows® XP Home  
Edition/XP Professional, installation of the USB  
driver is completed. If any message will appear,  
follow instructions on screen.  
3
4
When using Windows® XP Home Edition/XP  
Professional, click “OK”: A message will appear,  
read the message, and then click “OK”.  
When using OS other than Windows® XP Home  
Edition/XP Professional, skip this step.  
When using Windows® XP Home Edition/XP  
Professional, proceed to the next step.  
7
When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” screen  
appears, make sure that “Install the software  
automatically (Recommended)” has been checked,  
and then click “Next”.  
Click  
When using Windows® XP Home Edition/XP  
Professional, click “Continue Anyway”.  
When using OS other than Windows® XP Home  
Edition/XP Professional, skip this step.  
Check  
Click  
Click  
133  
8
9
A warning message will appear, but click “Continue  
Anyway”.  
lOperation with DVD Video Camera  
connected  
The following operations are not possible when  
connected to PC:  
- Camera recording and playback using operation  
buttons on DVD Video Camera  
- Power off using the power switch on DVD Video  
Camera  
NoimagewillappearontheLCDscreenorviewfinder  
of DVD Video Camera when it is connected to PC:  
Make sure that the DVD Video Camera is properly  
connected to PC: the ACCESS/PC indicator should  
show access to DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc, the beep  
sound indicates start/end of PC connection. (When  
disc is not accessed, the ACCESS/PC indicator will  
not blink or light.).  
If still images are recorded on disc, use Windows  
Explorer to double-click the drive icon of DVD Video  
Camera (DVD_CAMERA), and then click the  
“\DCIM\100CDPFP” folder: The still JPEG files will  
appear.  
Click  
When installation of the USB driver is finished, click  
“Finish”.  
Click  
After the installation of the USB Driver is finished,  
make sure to restart your PC.  
134  
Installing DVD-RAM Driver  
lBefore Installing DVD-RAM Driver  
If another DVD-RAM driver has already installed in your PC, confirm the original DVD-RAM driver.  
If the packet writing software which supports the DVD-RAM disc is installed, it is necessary to uninstall it, and then  
install the provided DVD-RAM driver.  
1
Insert the provided CD-ROM into the PC, and Click  
“DVD-RAM Driver” on the “Setup Menu” screen.  
3
Click “Next”.  
If the “Setup Menu” screen does not appear, double-  
click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
2
Thedriversetupscreenwillappear:ClicktheDriver  
and Formatter Setup” button.  
Click  
Click  
One of the messages below may appear.  
In this case, follow the message and continue the  
installation procedure.  
4
Check the contents of License Agreement: If you  
accept it, click “Yes” (The contents displayed on  
actual screen may differ from those in the figure.).  
Click  
135  
5
6
7
Check the folder in which the DVD-RAM driver will  
be installed, and then click “Next”.  
8
Installation will start. When installation is complete,  
some notes will appear: Check the contents, and then  
click “x” at the top right of window.  
The contents displayed on actual screen may differ  
from those in the figure.  
Click  
Click  
Check the program folder to be installed, and then  
click “Next”.  
9
IfyourPCusesWindows® Me/98SecondEdition/XP  
Home Edition / XP Professional, a message that  
promptsyoutorestartwillappear:Followtheon-screen  
instructions and then click “Finish”.  
Installing the DVD-RAM driver is now complete.  
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional,  
proceed with step 10.  
Click  
Confirm  
Click “Next”.  
Click  
10If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional, a  
message announcing the start for detecting device  
will appear. The detection of device will start, after  
which it will take several minutes for PC to detect the  
device. When detecting the device is complete, a  
messagethatpromptsyoutorestartwillappear:Click  
Yes” and then restart the PC.  
Click  
Installing the DVD-RAM driver is now complete.  
136  
lTo confirm the installation of the USB Driver and the DVD-RAM Driver  
You can check whether these installations have been completed successfully. Use the following procedure.  
1
Process for getting to Device Manager as follows.  
Windows® XP : Start - Control Panel - System -  
Hardware - Device Manager  
Windows® 2000 : Start - Settings -Control Panel -  
System - Hardware - Device Manager  
Windows® Me/98 Second Edition : Start - Settings -  
Control Panel - System - Device Manager  
2
Click “Device Manager”. Verify that the following  
items are listed on the screen.  
When using disc:  
“MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070 USB Device”  
1
under “DVD/CD-ROM drives” *  
®
*1:When using Windows 98 Second Edition or Me,  
“MATSHITADVD-CAMERAM5070islistedunder  
“CDROM” and “Disk drives” respectively.  
“PanasonicDVDCAMERADVDModeUSBInterface”  
under “Universal Serial Bus controllers”  
When using card:  
“MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070 USB Device”  
under “Disk drives”  
“Panasonic DVD CAMERA SD Mode USB Interface”  
under “Universal Serial Bus controllers”  
Example for using disc  
137  
Installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE  
“DVD-MovieAlbumSE” software is used to edit movies that conform to DVD Video Recording format.  
1
Insert the provided CD-ROM into the PC, and Click  
“DVD-MovieAlbumSE 3” on the “Setup Menu”  
screen.  
4
Choose “NTSC” for the TV broadcast system, click  
“Next”.  
If the “Setup Menu” screen does not appear, double-  
click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
2
The screen for installing “DVD-MovieAlbumSE”  
will appear: Click “Next”.  
Click  
Check  
5
If you do not change the folder where the software is  
installed, click “Next”.  
Click  
3
Carefully read the Software License Agreement: If  
you accept it, click “Yes”.  
Click  
Click  
138  
6
If you do not change the program folder name, click  
“Next”.  
9
Choose the restart option, and then click “Finish”.  
Click  
Click  
Note:  
®
If your PC uses Windows 2000 Professional/  
7
Check the contents, and then click “Next”.  
XP Home Edition/XP Professional, set the user name  
to “Administrator (computer's manager)” (or user  
namewithequivalentauthorization),logontoPC,and  
then install the software (if you do not have  
authorization, consult your system manager.).  
When using DVD-MovieAlbumSE software on  
®
Windows 2000 Professional/XP Home Edition/  
XP Professional, log on to your PC as Administrator  
withaloginnameequallyauthorized.Ifyoulogonwith  
a login name other than Administrator, you can not  
use DVD-MovieAlbumSE.  
You can not use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to handle an  
AVI file in DV format with no sound.  
When starting DVD-MovieAlbumSE, Mount  
Information window may appear or the recorded  
movies may not be shown. If this has occured, try the  
following procedure.  
1. Click “Preference”, and then “Device setting”.  
2. Select the drive in which the DVD-RAM disc is  
inserted in the “Drive Select” column, click "OK".  
Click  
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional a  
message announcing “READ ONLY FILE  
DETECTION MESSAGE” will appear: Click “No”.  
Proceed with installation, following the instructions  
on screen.  
“Preference” tab  
8
A message for verifying whether a shortcut icon is to  
be created on desktop will appear:  
If you want to create one, click “Yes”. If not , choose  
“No”.  
Click  
Installation will start.  
139  
Installing MyDVD  
MyDVD included in the provided CD-ROM does not contain the slideshows function. Therefore, you can not edit  
stills on MyDVD.  
1
Insert the provided CD-ROM into the PC, and Click  
“MyDVD 4.0” on the “Setup Menu” screen.  
4
After you accept the Software Licence Agreement,  
“ChooseDestinationLocationwillappear. Ifyoudo  
not wish to change the folder where the software is  
installed, click “Next”.  
If the “Setup Menu” screen does not appear, double-  
click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
2
The screen for installing “MyDVD” will appear:  
Click “Next”.  
Click  
5
Check the contents, and then click “Next”.  
Installation will start.  
Click  
3
Carefully read the Software License Agreement: If  
you accept it, click “Yes”.  
Click  
6
Click “Finish”, and then restart the PC.  
Click  
Click  
140  
Sonic Solutions Corporation, which developed  
MyDVD, recommends user registration of MyDVD,  
in order to offer appropriate support to customers.  
The guide for user registration will appear when you  
start MyDVD for the first time, or you can do it any  
time by accessing the following URL:  
For registered customers  
http://support. sonic. com  
Telephone Customer Support (For registered  
customers only)  
1-877-383-1124  
9am-6pm Pacific Standard Time. USA (Weekdays  
only)  
http://www.mydvd.com  
(You will need an Internet connection for user  
registration.)  
Creating DVD Video on PC from DVD-RAM Disc  
Recorded on DVD Video Camera  
Using DVD-MovieAlbumSE and MyDVD, you can create a DVD Video disc (DVD-R disc) from the images  
recorded on this DVD Video Camera, following the procedure below:  
1
2
Insert a recorded DVD-RAM disc into the DVD  
Video Camera, and connect the DVD Video Camera  
to the USB terminal of PC.  
3
4
Right-click the thumbnail from which you wish to  
create a DVD Video disc on the DVD-  
MovieAlbumSE screen, and execute “Export”.  
Start DVD-MovieAlbumSE, and edit the images on  
DVD-RAM disc as necessary.  
The “Program Export” screen, shown below, will  
appear: Choose “Same Resolution” and check “Use  
DVD-Video (LPCM)” in the “Export Mode” setting  
box. Choose “704 × 480 (recommended)” for  
“Resolution”.  
When starting DVD-MovieAlbumSE, Mount  
Information window may appear or the recorded  
movies may not be shown. If it has occured, try the  
following procedure.  
1. Click “Preference”, and then “Device setting”.  
2. Select the drive in which the DVD-RAM disc is  
inserted. In the “Drive Select” column, click  
"OK".  
“Preference” tab  
“Program Export” Screen  
141  
9
Click the Burn button: Writing to DVD-R disc will  
start. When writing is complete, a DVD video disc  
will be created.  
Then the disc cover of DVD Video Camera will open  
automatically.  
Note:  
Choose “Divide by Marker” in the “Option” box: Each  
sceneofprogramrecordedontheDVDVideoCamera  
will be saved as an independent movie file so that  
export can be executed at high speed. If you do not  
choose “Divide by Marker”, movie files may be unified  
and re-encoded, so it may take time to export them or  
the image quality may slightly deteriorate. DVD-  
MovieAlbumSE may automatically encode a movie  
recorded in the XTRA mode containing rapidly  
moving scenes (8 Mbps or higher), regardless of the  
“Divide by Marker” setting.  
Note:  
Even if you use the provided application software  
(MyDVD) and record wide movies on DVD-RAM disc to  
DVD-R disc, screen image will not be wider. DVD-R disc  
does not support the Wide setting and it is displayed  
lengthwise when you playback this disc.  
Do not choose “Simple Export” in the “Export Mode”  
setting box: Choosing it may stop export midway.  
Ifyouwanttochangethedestinationfolder,clickRef.”  
and specify the appropriate folder.  
If you want to create a new folder, type the name of  
new folder directly in the “Destination Folder” field.  
When you are going to record DVD-R disc by the movies  
which you have finished recording, set the Wide setting  
beforehand at “4:3” (See “Setting to Wide TV Screen  
Mode” on page 84).  
The following table shows the recordable time on 8 cm  
DVD-RdiscusingMyDVD.Therecordabletimeisshorter  
thanthatof8cmDVD-RAMdiscbecauseMyDVDalways  
records audio in the LPCM format.  
5
6
Click the Start button to start export.  
When export is complete, message “The file  
exporting was completed successfully.  
Do you wish to create a ‘DVD-Video’ disc or an  
‘MPEG file’ disc?” will appear. Check the small box  
for “Eject the disc being used”, and then click “Yes”.  
Moviequalitymodeof Recordable time on 8  
DVD-RAMdiscinDVD  
Video Camera  
cm DVD-R disc  
(using MyDVD)  
STD  
FINE  
XTRA  
Approx. 40 minutes  
Approx. 25 minutes  
Approx. 18 minutes  
Insert a brand-new DVD-R disc into the DVD Video  
Camera.  
7
8
DVD-MovieAlbumSE will automatically end, and  
the “Export to Disc” screen will appear: Click the  
“Start” button.  
MyDVD will automatically start. After a few  
moments, the exported scene will be automatically  
registered on the MyDVD editing screen:  
Now you can change the DVD menu to the desired  
style, change the title, etc. on this editing screen.  
142  
Uninstalling Software  
Use the following procedure to uninstall (delete) any provided software that has been installed:  
Uninstalling USB Driver  
®
7
Delete the following files.  
With Windows 98 Second Edition/Me:  
Windows® 98 Second Edition:  
C:\WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\Hitachi Ltd.  
DZ3298.inf  
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\IOSUBSYS\dzmvpdr  
.pdr  
1
2
3
Set the power switch on DVD Video Camera to  
“, and use the USB cable to connect it to the PC.  
Open “System” on “Control Panel”, and then choose  
the “Device Manager” tab.  
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\DZMVUM  
SS.sys  
Delete “MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070” in  
“CDROM”.  
Windows® Me:  
C:\WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\Hitachi Ltd.  
DZ32Me.inf  
If no item exists, proceed with the next step.  
No extension may appear depending on the  
setting on PC.  
4
5
Delete “MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070” in  
"Disk drives".  
If the INF folder cannot be found, use Explorer to  
choose the “View” menu, “Folder Options”, "View"  
tab, and then “Show all files”: Click “OK” and then  
try again.  
If no item exists, proceed with the next step.  
Delete the following item in “Universal Serial Bus  
controllers”:  
8
Disconnect the DVD Video Camera from PC, and  
then restart the PC.  
“Panasonic DVD CAMERA DVD Mode USB  
Interface”  
If no item exists, proceed with the next step.  
Close Device Manager.  
6
If the message for restart appears, click “No”.  
143  
®
With Windows 2000 Professional/XP Home Edition/XP Professional:  
1
2
3
4
Set the power switch on DVD Video Camera to  
”, and use the USB cable to connect it to the PC.  
Open “System” on “Control Panel”, and then click  
“Device Manager” under the “Hardware” tab.  
Delete “MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070 USB  
Device” in “DVD/CD-ROM drive”.  
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional, delete  
“MATSHITA DVD-CAMERA M5070 USB  
Device” in “Disk drives”.  
If your PC uses Windows® XP Home Edition/XP  
Professional or no item exists, proceed with the next  
step.  
Figure 1.  
5
Delete “Panasonic DVD CAMERA DVD Mode  
USBInterfaceinUniversalSerialBuscontrollers”.  
8
When Windows\inf folder is opened select all files  
beginning with oem as noted figure 2 .  
If no item exists, proceed with the next step.  
Close Device Manager.  
6
7
If the message for restart appears, click “No”.  
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional, open  
the C:\WINNT\INFfolder.  
If your PC uses Windows® XP Home Edition/XP  
Professional, open the C:\WINDOWS\INF folder.  
Figure 2.  
Open each file beginning with oem0.inf with  
application software Notepad provided with  
Windowsbythefollowingmethod(Rightclickonthe  
oem0.inf and select “open with” Notepad.)  
Search for the files with the following entry on the  
second and fourth lines, and delete them:  
; Panasonic DVD DIGICAM USB Driver  
Installation File  
; Support Model : VDR- M50/70 Series  
Extension “.inf” may not appear, depending on the  
setting of PC.  
If the INF folder cannot be found or above a warning  
message appears, use Explorer to choose “Tools”  
menu then select “Folder Options”, “View” tab, and  
then “Show hidden files and folders” as noted on  
figure 1 .  
9
Also delete the .PNF files numerically associated  
with the oem file, Example (If you delete oem7.inf  
file also delete oem7.pnf file.  
10Disconnect the DVD Video Camera from PC, and  
then restart the PC.  
Deleting Other Applications  
To uninstall the other applications, use “Control Panel” to open “Add or Remove Applications”, choose the  
applications to be uninstalled from the displayed list of applications, and then click the “Change/Remove”.  
Note:  
After uninstalling software, be sure to restart the PC.  
144  
Supplementary Information  
Introduction to Optional Accessories  
Video Camera Accessories  
Accessory#  
LM-AK60U  
Description  
8cm DVD-RAM  
8cm DVD-R  
LM-RK30U  
PV-DAC13  
AC adaptor with AC Cable and DC Cable  
CGA-DU07A  
CGA-DU14A*  
CGA-DU21A  
680mAh/Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack  
1360mAh/Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack  
2040mAh/Rechargeable Lithium Ion Battery Pack  
RP-SDH512U1A  
RP-SDH256U1A  
RP-SD128BU1A  
RP-SD064BPPA  
RP-SD032BPPA  
512 MB SD Memory Card  
256 MB SD Memory Card  
128 MB SD Memory Card  
64 MB SD Memory Card  
32 MB SD Memory Card  
BN-SDCAPE/1B  
(For USA)  
BN-SDCAPU/1B  
(For Canada)  
USB Reader/Writer for SD Memory Card (compatible with MultimediaCard)  
BN-SDABPE/1B  
(For USA)  
BN-SDABPU/1B  
(For Canada)  
SD PCMCIA Adaptor (compatible with MultimediaCard)  
Video Flash (only for VDR-M70PP)  
VW-FLH3  
* Please refer to page 43 concerning the battery charging time and available recording time.  
NOTE: Accessories and/or model numbers may vary by country. Please consult your local dealer.  
145  
Information on Round DVD Holder  
This DVD Video Camera cannot use a square adapter, such as for 8 cm DVD-RAM disc, 8 cm DVD-R disc: Remove  
the disc from square adapter and set it in Round DVD Holder, referring to the instruction sheet of disc.  
lRemoving disc from square adaptor  
(Example 1)  
Snap off and  
remove lock pin  
(Example 2)  
Slide the disc obliquely upward  
so that it is not caught by claws.  
Note:  
Refer to page 74 if you want to correctly set the removed disc in Round DVD Holder so that it can be used in this DVD  
Video Camera.  
146  
Cleaning  
Be sure to set the power switch to “OFF” before cleaning this DVD Video Camera.  
lCleaning LCD screen and camera  
lens  
lDo not use benzene or thinner to  
clean DVD Video Camera case  
Use a dry, soft cloth to wipe dirt off. When cleaning the  
LCD screen, be careful not to use force, scratch it, or  
subject it to impact: Doing such could cause a defect in  
the screen, resulting in display unevenness, or damage  
the LCD monitor.  
The coating of case could peel off or the case could  
deteriorate. Wipe off dirt on the case with a moist cloth  
which has been completely wrung out. When using a  
chemical cleaning cloth, follow instructions for use.  
lIf dust adheres to the viewfinder  
lens, remove it using a cotton cloth.  
Donotrubthelenswithforce:Doingsocouldscratchthe  
lens.  
147  
Terminology  
DVD-RAM disc:  
Rewritable DVD disc.  
DVD-R disc:  
One-time recordable DVD disc.  
DVD Video format:  
This application format establishes the file name, directory structure, data format, etc. to record videos (movies). A  
generally available DVD video conforms to this format.  
DVD Video recorder:  
This device can record video and audio on any recordable DVD disc, such as DVD-RAM, that conforms to the DVD  
VideoRecordingformat.SomeDVDVideorecorderscanrecordonaDVD-RdiscconformingtoDVDVideoformat.  
A DVD Video recorder that is compatible with 8 cm DVD-RAM can play back DVD-RAM discs recorded on the  
DVD Video Camera.  
DVD Video Recording format:  
Format recorded video data on writable type DVD disc: This format is adopted by DVD Video Cameras and DVD-  
RAM recorders that are compatible with DVD-RAM.  
DVD Player:  
This device can play back video and audio signals recorded on DVD Video and DVD-R discs using the DVD Video  
format. Most DVD players can play back a DVD-R disc recorded on the DVD Video Camera (some DVD players  
cannot play back the disc).  
SD Memory Card:  
SanDisk, Matsushita and Toshiba jointly developed this memory card standard in 1999. The card is 32 mm long x  
24 mm wide x 2.1 mm thick, and has 9 pins. Since the SD Memory Card was developed based on MultiMediaCard  
(MMC),MMCcanbeinsertedintoSDMemoryCardslotandused.However,anSDMemoryCardcannotbeinserted  
in the slot exclusively for MMC.  
USB 2.0:  
There are two kinds of USB ports for a PC. As for USB2.0 (full speed), transfer speed is slow, and, as for USB2.0  
(high speed), transfer speed is higher-speed. If the DVD Video Camera is connected to the PC via a USB2.0 (high  
speed port), movies can be enjoyed without difficulty.  
Infrared sensor:  
This sensor is used to adjust the white balance.  
Thumbnail:  
This refers to a reduced screen displayed on Disc Navigation in order to identify the recorded image contents.  
Scene:  
Video (movie): “One scene” refers to images recorded from one press of REC button until recording is stopped by  
pressing the REC button again.  
Photo (still): “One scene” refers to a single photo recorded by pressing the REC button.  
Slot-in type PC:  
PC that has a DVD drive into which a DVD is directly inserted or ejected from without using a tray.  
148  
Disc-protect:  
This disables writing to disc (protects disc from writing) so that images recorded on DVD-RAM disc cannot be  
accidentally deleted and the disc cannot be initialized.  
Howling:  
This phenomenon occurs as follows: When the DVD Video Camera is connected to a device, such as TV, the audio  
input to the microphone of DVD Video Camera is amplified and output from the speakers of TV, and the signal is  
again input to the microphone: This is repeated to form an endless loop of audio signal, and the signal is amplified  
uptotheaudiooutputamplitudelimitofthedevice.Howlingcanbepreventedbychangingthepositionalrelationship  
between the DVD Video Camera and TV, or by turning down the volume on TV.  
Suspending PC:  
This function stores the status of PC before it is turned off: It will restart the PC in the same status as immediately  
before PC was turned off, when the PC is turned on next time.  
Video selector:  
This device can input multiple audio and video signals, and select the desired audio and video signals among those  
input, to output them.  
Finalize:  
ThisprocessmakesaDVD-RdiscrecordedonthisDVDVideoCameraplayableonaDVDplayer, etc. thatconforms  
to 8 cm DVD-R: No further recording can be made on a finalized DVD-R disc.  
MultiMediaCard:  
This is a memory card standard jointly developed by Siemens and SanDisk in 1997. The card is 32 mm long x 24 mm  
wide x 1.4 mm thick, and has 7 pins. It can be inserted into SD Memory Card slot and used.  
Linear PCM recording:  
AudiorecordingformatsimilartoMPEG1AudioLayer2:However, LinearPCMdoesnotcompressanaudiosignal,  
but instead samples it and converts it to a digital signal to be recorded. Therefore, the amount of data used is larger  
than that of MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2.  
Laser pickup block:  
This block emits laser beam to a disc, and then collects the laser beam reflected  
from the disc to convert it to an electric signal. The block consists of a laser, lens,  
receiving element, etc.  
Laser pickup block  
149  
Before Requesting Service  
Check 1  
No movie can be recorded  
Skip or search playback does  
not work well  
Check 3  
Movie can be recorded only on DVD-RAM or DVD-R  
disc.  
Check the following:  
Is DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc inserted?  
Is power switch set to “  
If the temperature inside the DVD Video Camera is  
high, normal operation may not be possible. Turn the  
DVD Video Camera off, wait for a few moments, and  
then turn it on again for operation.  
”?  
Is the DVD-RAM disc in DVD Video Camera write-  
protected? Release the write-protect.  
Does disc have remaining recording space?  
If movie still cannot be recorded after the above  
checks, the disc may be damaged: Use another disc.  
• No operation can be  
performed because the  
ACCESS/PC or CARD  
ACCESSindicatoronthisDVD  
Check 4  
Video Camera remains lit or  
blinking.  
Check 2  
No still can be recorded  
• Afterdiscorcard isinserted, it  
takes some time until  
recording is possible.  
Still can be recorded only on DVD-RAM disc, SD  
Memory Card or MultiMediaCard.  
Check the following:  
Is DVD-RAM disc, SD Memory Card or  
MultiMediaCard inserted?  
Inthefollowingcases, itwilltakemoretimethanusual  
until operation is possible:  
Ispowerswitchsettomatchtherecordingmedium?  
When using DVD-RAM disc:  
When disc or card is removed and then reinserted  
When date changes (e.g., during the first recording  
of the day)  
Set to “  
”.  
When the temperature is greatly different from the  
time of previous recording  
When disc with scratches, dirt or fingerprints is  
inserted  
When disc is subject to severe vibrations  
When the battery or DC cord was disconnected  
instead of following the correct procedure using  
power switch to turn the DVD Video Camera off  
When using SD Memory Card or  
MultiMediaCard:  
Set to “  
”.  
Is loaded DVD-RAM disc write-protected?  
When using SD Memory Card: Is it locked?  
Doesdiscorcardhaveremainingrecordingspace?  
If still cannot be recorded after the above checks, the  
disc or card may be damaged: Use another disc or  
card.  
150  
Check 5  
No DVD Video Camera operation  
No image appears on the LCD  
screen or in the viewfinder  
Check 7  
Is a fully charged battery pack attached?  
Is the DVD Video Camera powered from AC outlet?  
Is DVD Video Camera connected to PC using USB  
cable?  
Unplug the USB cable.  
Check 6  
No image in viewfinder  
Does DVD Video Camera stop at the end of the  
scene to which wipe-out was set and played back?  
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.  
Is LCD monitor open?  
No image will appear in viewfinder unless the LCD  
monitor is closed and securely locked to DVD Video  
Camera.  
151  
Error Messages  
A message may appear while you are operating the DVD Video Camera. If a message appears, refer to  
the following table and take appropriate corrective action.  
Messages are arranged in alphabetical order.  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
(1) Dataerror inapartof Itispossiblethatthesystemcannotnormallycompletewritingoffile  
image file. Repair data when, for example, power is turned off for some reason during  
now?  
recording or editing (deleting, dividing or combining scenes, or  
(2) Found error in image creating play list). Selecting “YES” will automatically repair the  
file. Repair data now?  
(3) Data error in all  
image file. Repair all  
data now?  
video file, but even if “NO” is selected, the same message will  
appearwhentheDVDVideoCameraisturnedonnexttime.(Donot  
remove the disc while the DVD Video Camera is recognizing it:  
Ignoring this will deactivate the file repair function.)  
Follow the instructions on screen, taking note of the following  
cautions:  
Data may not be repaired, depending on the timing when power  
was turned off.  
Data may not be repaired normally if data recorded on another  
recorder is mixed in.  
The repaired data may be different from the original recorded  
content because of partial deletion of defective portion.  
Since the date/time of repair is added to the repaired data (only  
the corrected portion for partial repair), the original date/time  
information will be lost.  
Since all movies, and then all stills, are repaired, the order of  
recorded contents will be lost.  
(In case of message (2) (3) only)  
See *1 on page 157.  
(1) Error has occurred. Error has occurred. Try to restart the DVD Video Camera using  
Please restart.  
the following methods:  
(1) Turn power off, remove the battery pack or AC adaptor and  
reattach it, and then turn power on again.  
(2) Turn power off, and reinsert the disc. Then turn power on again.  
(2) Error has occurred.  
Please reinsert a disc.  
(3) Error has occurred. (3) See *3 on page 157.  
Error code No. xxxx.  
(4) If you have another disc available, check to see if any problem  
9, 42, 45, 46  
Please read the manual. occurs with the disc. If another disc can be used normally, the  
original disc may be defective: Contact the disc manufacturer.  
Iftheaboveprocedurescannotsolvetheproblem, takenoteof  
(4) ERROR xxxx  
(5) DISK xxxx  
the error number, and contact your dealer.  
Reference: “Error Code 2881” shows that the disc cannot be  
recognized properly.  
(1) This disc must be  
formatted before it can  
be used by this camera.  
(2) Do not format this  
discifyouwanttorecord  
from the PC connection  
terminal.  
DVD-R disc that was not initialized for camera use was inserted.  
47  
(3)Formatthediscnow?  
Battery pack is almost  
empty. Replace it.  
Replace with a charged battery, or use AC adaptor to power the  
DVD Video Camera.  
42, 45  
106  
Cannot combine scene. Unlessconsecutivescenesareselected,theycannotbecombined.  
152  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
Select only movies and combine them.  
Cannot combine.  
Deselect PHOTO  
scenes.  
106  
Cannot combine scene Scenes cannot be combined, because the programs are different.  
of multiple programs. Create a play list.  
116  
106  
Cannot combine. Select Select a range of at least 2 scenes to be combined, and then  
multiple scenes. combine them.  
Cannot delete scenes. Thismayoccurwhenscenethatwaseditedfordivision, etc. istobe  
deleted.  
106  
128  
Combine the divided scenes, and then delete them.  
Cannot execute.  
Change display  
category to ALL.  
Thismessagewillappearifyouattempttocombineormovescenes  
with “Category: VIDEO or PHOTO” specified.  
Cannot execute.  
Unselect multiple  
scenes.  
Division or change in thumbnail was executed when multiple  
scenes were selected.  
98  
28  
CANNOT RECORD  
PHOTOS  
Are you using DVD-R disc? You cannot record still images on DVD-  
R disc. Use DVD-RAM disc to record still images.  
Cannot replace  
thumbnail on PHOTO  
scenes.  
The thumbnail of a still cannot be changed.  
Select a movie.  
103  
Cannot select any more The maximum number of selectable scenes is 999.  
scenes.  
111  
CARD ALMOST FULL Remaining space is only enough to record less than 10 stills.  
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.  
33, 101  
Carderrorhasoccurred. Was the card formatted on PC? Was formatting interrupted  
Format the card now?  
midway? When using the card on this DVD Video Camera, choose  
“YES” and format it.  
125  
31  
Carderrorhasoccurred. The card may be damaged: Use another card.  
Formatting is not  
complete.  
Card error.  
The card terminals may be dirty: Wipe off dirt, and try the card  
again, or use another card.  
31  
Data other than still image may be included: Use another card.  
Carderrorhasoccurred. Carderrorcouldhaveoccurredduringeditingofscenes.Turnoffthe  
Keep card inside &  
restart.  
DVDVideoCamerawiththecardbeingusedinside,connecttheAC  
adaptor, and then power the DVD Video Camera again. Repair of  
scenes will be attempted.  
45, 50  
Card full.  
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.  
33, 101  
No more recording on this card can be done: Delete unnecessary  
stills or use another card.  
Card full.  
Cannot execute.  
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.  
33, 101  
Card has no data.  
This message will appear when an attempt is made to execute  
playback or editing on Disc Navigation with no scene recorded.  
Card is not formatted.  
Format the card now?  
Was the card formatted on PC? When using the card on this DVD  
Video Camera, choose “YES” and format it.  
125  
153  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
Control Information  
Error.  
Mismatch may occur between the recorded image and scene  
information.  
126  
Update the control information.  
Use another disc.  
See *3 on page 157.  
28, 74  
COPY PROTECTED  
DISC ACCESS  
The video signal input to this DVD Video Camera may be copy-  
guarded.  
Some prerecorded video materials, such as movies, are guarded  
against copying.  
Copy-guarded materials cannot be recorded on this DVD Video  
Camera.  
75  
51, 52  
The recorded scene is being stored on disc.  
Wait until the message disappears, and you can start to use the  
DVD Video Camera.  
This DVD Video Camera is verifying whether the correct disc has  
been inserted.  
Wait until the message disappears, and you can start to use the  
DVD Video Camera.  
This message will be displayed for a little longer when the date  
changes.  
DISC ALMOST FULL  
The disc will soon be full, and recording will be impossible.  
Delete unnecessary scenes and try the disc again, or use another  
disc.  
32, 33,101  
127  
Disc error has occurred. Disc error occurred during finalizing, and finalizing failed.  
Finalizing is not  
complete.  
Replace the disc.  
See *3 on 157  
Disc error has occurred. Has the disc been initialized on PC? Has initializing the disc on  
Format the disc now?  
PC been interrupted?  
Choose “YES” and initialize the disc when using it on this DVD  
Video Camera. Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.  
See *2 on page 157.  
125  
Disc error has occurred. The disc may be dirty.  
Formatting is not  
complete.  
Remove the disc and wipe off fingerprints, dust, etc. before reusing  
it, or use another disc.  
74, 125  
This message may also appear if you insert a disc for which  
formatting was interrupted midway. In this case, use another disc.  
Disc error has occurred. Disc error could have occurred during editing of scenes.  
Keep disc inside &  
restart.  
Turn off the DVD Video Camera with the disc being used in it,  
connectACadaptor, andthenpowertheDVDVideoCameraagain.  
Repair of scenes will be tried.  
45  
28, 74  
125  
Disc error.  
Use another disc.  
See *3 on page 157.  
Mismatch in recording information may be caused by editing  
done on some device other than this DVD Video Camera.  
Initialize the disc or use another disc.  
Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.  
“DISCERROR”appears Ifyouhavewrite-protectedadiscusingthewrite-protectsettingtool  
when an attempt to (WPTOOL)thatisequippedwiththeDVD-RAMdrivercontainedon  
release write-protect is the CD-ROM provided with this DVD Video Camera, you cannot  
made.  
release the write-protect on this DVD Video Camera as is. Use the  
write-protect setting tool on PC to release the write-protect.  
154  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
Disc full. Cannot  
execute.  
Delete unnecessary scenes before using this disc, or use another  
disc.  
101  
Disc has no data.  
This message will appear when an attempt is made to execute  
playback or editing on Disc Navigation with no scene recorded.  
Disc has no Play List.  
Switching of play list was selected with no play list stored.  
117  
Disc includes protected The disc may be software protected from a device other than this  
scenes. Delete scenes? DVDVideoCamera. Toreleaseinthiscase,usethe devicethathas  
executed software-protect.  
Disc is full. Cannot add The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be  
control info.  
entered, so the control information for generating thumbnails  
cannot be added.  
101, 106  
Combine several scenes or delete them.  
Disc is not formatted.  
Format the disc now?  
Has the disc been initialized on a PC?  
Choose “YES” and initialize the disc when using it on this DVD  
Video Camera. Initialization will delete all data on the disc.  
See *2 on page 157  
125  
DPOF is not set to a  
scene.  
ThismessagewillappearwhenSlideShow:DPOFisspecifiedfor  
the card to which DPOF was not set.  
129  
110  
DPOF scenes over limit. The maximum number of scenes for which DPOF can be set is 999.  
Cannot set DPOF  
scenes.  
Drive overheat. Please The temperature inside the DVD Video Camera is too high, and  
retry later.  
reading or writing of the data on disc may not be performed  
normally.  
50  
32  
Turn the DVD Video Camera off and wait for a while. The  
temperature will be effectively decreased if the DVD Video Camera  
is placed in a well-ventilated spot.  
DVD-R Disc, Video  
mode cannot be  
changed.  
With DVD-R disc, the movie quality mode once used for recording  
cannot be changed.  
END OF DISC  
The disc is full.  
You cannot record on this disc anymore. Prepare another disc or  
delete unnecessary movie scenes from this disc.  
101  
107  
End scene cannot be  
divided.  
Division is not possible at the end of scene.  
Error occurred. Please AbnormalityhasoccurredwiththeDVD-RAMdisctoberepaired.  
replace disc or format  
disc.  
Initialize the disc before using it, or use another disc. Initializing  
the disc will erase all data on it.  
125  
See *2 on page 157.  
Error occurred. Please AnabnormalityoccurredwithaDVD-Rdisctoberepaired.Replace  
127  
31  
replace disc.  
the disc.  
Finalize may not be  
Instantaneous shutoff occurred during finalizing, after which power  
complete.Finalizeagain was supplied and disc was inserted.  
now?  
Itisunrecordableonthis The inserted card cannot be used in this DVD Video Camera: Use  
card.  
another card.  
JPEG file related to  
scenes are not found.  
This message will appear when stills recorded on DVD-RAM disc  
using a device other than this DVD Video Camera are to be copied  
to card.  
155  
Reference  
page  
Message  
NO CARD  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
Insert a card.  
49  
No card.  
Please insert card.  
No card is inserted.  
Insert a card.  
49  
NO DISC  
This message may appear when the DVD Video Camera or disc is  
moved from a cold place to a warm place.  
Condensation has occurred on the DVD Video Camera lens or  
DVD-RAM drive. Do not remove the disc; leave the DVD Video  
Camera turned off in a place as dry as possible for 1-2 hours.  
9
The disc has not been inserted.  
Insert it.  
46  
No more scenes. Play  
List was deleted.  
All scenes are deleted from the play list.  
Since a play list with no scenes cannot be supported by  
specifications, a play list from which all registered scenes have  
been deselected will be deleted.  
119, 120  
Photo cannot be  
divided.  
Still image cannot be divided.  
107  
116  
PlayLists over limit.  
An attempt was made to create new play list or copy play list, even  
though limit specified for play lists in the video recording standard  
had already been stored.  
Same scenes on Play  
List will be deleted.  
Delete scenes?  
This will appear when scenes are to be deleted.  
When a play list exists on disc, an attempt to delete scenes in  
programwilldisplaythismessage. (Thismessagewillnotappear  
if you deselect scenes from play list.)  
101  
Scenes over limit.  
Cannot add scene.  
The number of scenes entered in play list has reached the limit that  
can be entered.  
Delete several scenes.  
116, 120  
107, 116  
Scenes over limit.  
Cannot divide scene.  
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be  
entered.  
Delete several scenes.  
Scenes over limit.  
Cannot move scene.  
This message will appear if you try to move a scene when the  
number of scenes has already reached the registrable limit.  
104, 116  
Stop processing  
The button was pressed to stop processing of multiple scenes.  
There was no scene  
which can be deleted.  
ThismessagewillappearifyoutrytodeletemultiplescenesonDisc  
Navigation when all the selected scenes have been locked.  
Release the lock on scenes before executing deletion.  
101, 109  
31  
This card cannot be  
used.  
The card cannot be used in this DVD Video Camera: Use another  
card.  
Please replace card.  
This disc cannot be  
used. Please replace  
disc.  
A disc that cannot be used on this DVD Video Camera has been  
loaded. Check the type of disc.  
29  
This disc is recorded by This DVD Video Camera can use only discs recorded on the NTSC  
the PAL system. Please system. A disc recorded on the PAL system cannot be used on this  
replace disc.  
DVD Video Camera.  
Top scene cannot be  
divided.  
Division is not possible at the start of scene.  
107  
156  
Reference  
page  
Message  
Cause & Troubleshooting  
UNFORMAT DISC  
The disc is not initialized or it is damaged.  
If this message appears, be sure to initialize the disc on this DVD  
Video Camera before using it.  
Reinitializing even a disc used on this DVD Video Camera may be  
necessary (initializing will erase all recorded contents on disc). If  
thismessageappears, trytoinitializethedisc.Ifthesamemessage  
still appears, the disc may be damaged: Use another disc.  
125  
See *2 on page 157.  
Use AC adapter/  
charger.  
FinalizationisnotpossiblewhentheDVDVideoCameraispowered  
by a battery pack: Use the AC adaptor for finalization.  
45, 127  
Use AC adapter/  
charger.  
ScenecannotberepairedwhentheDVDVideoCameraispowered  
by a battery pack.  
Turn off power.  
IftheACadaptorisunavailableinhandyplace,removethedisc,use  
the opposite side, or use another disc. To repair the removed disc,  
insert the disc into the DVD Video Camera afterwards, and connect  
the AC adaptor.  
45  
VIDEOscene cannotbe No movie can be copied to card.  
108  
copied to card.  
Select stills and copy them to card.  
Write protected.  
Check card.  
A locked card or write-protected disc is inserted.  
Release the lock or write-protect using the Card or Disc  
Navigation menu.  
31, 124  
Write protected.  
Check disk.  
*1  
Thismessagemayalsoappearwhendirtadherestodisc. Ifthismessageappearswhenarecordeddiscisrecognized  
immediately after it is inserted, do not repair the disc; remove it and then use a soft, dry cloth to clean off the dirt  
before using it.  
This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not repair the disc; turn the DVD Video  
Camera off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.  
If the repair message appears when you turn the DVD Video Camera on from off with a disc loaded after recording  
on it, choose repair.  
If the repair message appears when recording and playback are normally possible with another disc - and no  
condensation has occurred and the disc is not dirty - choose repair.  
*2  
This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. In this case, do not initialize the disc; remove it and then  
use a soft, dry cloth to clean the dirt before using it.  
Thismessagemayalsoappearwhencondensationoccurs.Inthiscase,donotinitializethedisc;turntheDVDVideo  
Camera off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.  
Initialization will delete all data on disc.  
*3  
This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. Remove the disc and then use a soft, dry cloth to clean  
the dirt before using it.  
This message may also appear when condensation occurs. Wait until the DVD Video Camera dries out, and then  
turn it on again.  
This message will appear when a single-sided disc is insertedin reverse. Reinsert the disc correctly. (Insert the disc  
with the label printed surface facing the outside.)  
157  
Troubleshooting  
Check to see the following before asking for a repair. If the suggested solution still cannot restore the DVD  
Video Camera to normal, do not attempt to repair it yourself, but consult your dealer.  
Power supplies  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Battery pack cannot be Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?  
charged.  
Charge the battery pack at 50-86ºF (10-30ºC).  
* Ifthebatterypackdoes  
notchargeafteryoutry  
the four procedures  
shown on the right, it  
may be dead:  
Is the battery pack abnormally hot?  
Remove the battery pack, leave it for a while to cool down, then  
charge it.  
23  
Is the DC cord connected to AC adaptor? Unplug it.  
Purchase a new  
battery pack.  
Has the battery pack been unused for a long time?  
Remove the battery pack, and then reattach it.  
Battery pack weakens  
fast.  
AreyouusingtheDVDVideoCamerawherethetemperatureisvery  
low?  
The DVD Video Camera can normally be used for 40-60 minutes  
with a fully charged CGA-DU14A battery pack, but this time will be  
shorter at low temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand.  
43  
44  
Battery pack may be dead.  
The performance of battery pack will deteriorate if it is used for an  
extended period of time or frequently: Purchase a new battery pack.  
The CHARGE indicator Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?  
onACadaptorisblinking. Charge the battery pack in environment where the temperature is  
50-86°F (10-30°).  
The battery pack has possibly discharged excessively. Continue  
charging: After a while, the battery pack will be charged to the  
specified voltage, and the CHARGE indicator will light. Then the  
battery charge will be completed normally.  
43  
23  
Power turns off  
Is battery pack charged?  
immediately after being Charge it.  
turned on.  
When power is turned  
on, the LCD screen will  
turn on and off.  
Power goes off  
unexpectedly.  
Is Power Save set to “On”?  
If the powered DVD Video Camera is left for as long as 5 minutes  
withoutrecordingorplaybackwithPowerSave:Onspecified, itwill  
automatically turn off to save battery power. To restart recording in  
92  
this case, set the power switch to “OFF” and then set it to “  
”. You  
can also specify “Power Save: Off” to stop automatic power off.  
Power cannot be turned Detach the battery pack or AC adaptor once, and then press the  
off.  
RESET button of DVD Video Camera: Reattach a power supply to  
DVD Video Camera before turning it on again.  
158  
During recording  
Symptom  
Reference  
page  
Cause and Correction  
PressingtheRECbutton Is input image copy-guarded?  
will not start recording. Copy-guarded image cannot be recorded on this DVD Video  
Camera.  
75  
74  
Recording starts but  
stops immediately.  
Is disc scratched or do dirt or fingerprints adhere to it?  
Clean the disc. If there is still no improvement, replace the disc.  
If you turn this DVD Video Camera on for many hours in a high  
temperature location, this DVD Video Camera may automatically  
stop recording for the protection of the lens in the laser pickup  
assembly. In this case, follow the messages on the display of this  
DVD Video Camera.  
To start recording again, turn this DVD Video Camera off and leave  
it for a while.  
Is some other AV device directly connected to the AV input/output  
jack of this DVD Video Camera?  
If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as AV  
selector, the video signal may be transmitted incorrectly. In such a  
case, reduce the number of devices through which the video signal  
is transmitted, or connect AV device directly.  
75  
Are you attempting to record an image from a video game or PC?  
FromsomevideogamesorPCs, imagescannotberecordedonthis  
DVD Video Camera.  
75  
91  
38  
65  
64  
LCD screen is hard to  
see.  
Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted?  
Stop recording and adjust the brightness.  
Is the DVD Video Camera being used outdoors?  
Usetheviewfinder.WhenusingLCDmonitor,adjustitsanglesothat  
LCD screen is not exposed to direct sunlight.  
Focus is not correct.  
Is it difficult to use auto focus with your subject?  
Focus manually.  
Does “MF” appear?  
The DVD Video Camera is set to manual focus. Focus the subject  
manually, or release manual focus.  
Is the diopter control correctly adjusted if you are using the  
viewfinder as a monitor?  
Adjust the diopter control.  
37  
50  
In cases other than the above, set the power switch to “OFF”, and  
then set it to “  
”, “  
” or “  
” again.  
Some vibrations are felt These vibrations or sound are caused by disc drive: This does not  
or slight sound is heard indicate a fault.  
from mechanism.  
159  
During playback  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
Recognitionofdiscisnot Is disc dirty?  
74  
complete  
Use a soft, dry cloth to clean it.  
Pressing the playback  
button will not start  
playback.  
Has the image been recorded by devices other than this DVD Video  
Camera?  
Playback of images recorded on devices other than this DVD Video  
Camera may be impossible on this DVD Video Camera.  
126  
Has scene been edited on a device other than this DVD Video  
Camera?  
If a scene recorded on this DVD Video Camera is edited on a device  
otherthanthisDVDVideoCamera,playbackmaynotbepossibleon  
this DVD Video Camera.  
No playback picture  
Is TV input selector set correctly?  
appears on TV screen. Some TVs have multiple video input jacks. Check whether the  
correctinputwasselectedonTVtomatchtheconnectedjacks.Ifthe  
DVD Video Camera is connected to VCR, set its input selector to  
“external input (LINE)”.  
70  
Is the DVD Video Camera connected to TV correctly?  
Check the connections.  
69  
74  
Playback picture is  
Is disc scratched or do dirt or fingerprints adhere to it?  
momentarily interrupted. Clean the disc.  
Poor playback picture  
Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and recorded?  
The problem may be remedied if a VCR equipped with TBC circuit  
is used for playback.  
Playback picture is  
greatly distorted.  
Was recording of external input made with “Frame” specified?  
Specify “Field” for “PHOTO Input” in record mode settings.  
88  
No sound  
Is the TV volume control set correctly?  
Adjust TV volume control.  
Disc Navigation  
thumbnails do not  
appear.  
Was the image recorded from AV input/output jack with  
interference?  
Record images with no noise or disturbance.  
Photos on card cannot This DVD Video Camera can play back image data recorded on SD  
be played back.  
Memory Card in other digital cameras conforming to the DCF  
(Design rule for Camera File system) standard. The range of image  
data normally playable on this DVD Video Camera is that withpixels  
from 80 horizontal x 60 vertical to 4000 horizontal x 3000 vertical. If  
the pixel data is outside this range, blue thumbnails will appear  
(thumbnails* in the figure), meaning the image is unplayable.  
Al  
l
scenes  
1/ 6  
PLAY  
Fig. 1  
*
Even when the number of pixels is within the above range, playback  
maynotbepossible, dependingontherecordingstatusofthedigital  
camera used.  
DCF(DesignruleforCameraFilesystem)isanintegratedimagefile  
format for digital cameras: Image files can be used on all digital  
devices conforming to DCF.  
It will take some time to When playing back a still, “Playback.will appear: Stills with a large  
playbackphotosoncard. number of pixels will take some time to appear.  
160  
When the DVD Video Camera is connected to PC:  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
No drive icon appears on The DVD Video Camera is not turned on.  
50  
PC.  
Check the power supply.  
Driver is not properly recognized.  
Turn PC off and on again. If the drive icon still does not appear, use  
“Refresh driver” in Device Manager to reinstall the driver.  
Turn PC off and then disconnect the USB cable. Turn PC on again,  
and then use the USB cable to connect the DVD Video Camera to  
PC.  
Make sure the USB cable is completely plugged into this DVD Video  
Camera.  
®
If a yellow “!” mark is attached to some device in Windows Device  
Manager, uninstall the USB device driver, and then reinstall it,  
following the procedure on page 133.  
Error occurs in playback IferroroccurswithUSBconnection,thetransferrateisnotsufficient.  
ofDVDVideoCameraon It is recommended that you use a USB terminal conforming to  
148  
PC.  
USB2.0 when connecting the DVD Video Camera.  
Application is  
abnormally run on PC.  
Turn the PC and DVD Video Camera off, and try again.  
Error occurs during  
writing to DVD-R disc.  
ThetemperatureofDVDVideoCameraistoohighduetocontinuous  
operation.  
Disconnect the DVD Video Camera from PC once, remove the disc  
from the DVD Video Camera, and then turn it off. After a few  
moments, connect them again and write to a brand-new disc.  
Transfer of images stops. Connect the DVD Video Camera to another USB terminal of PC. If  
your PC is a desktop type, it is recommended that you use USB  
terminal on the back of PC.  
DVD-RAM/R/RW drive This problem may be solved if the software related to DVD-RAM/R/  
built into PC cannot be RW of your PC is upgraded, or if the DVD-RAM driver is uninstalled.  
®
used after the provided However, with Windows 98 Second Edition / Me / 2000  
software has been  
installed.  
Professional, uninstalling the DVD-RAM driver will make it  
impossible for the JPEG stills recorded on DVD-RAM on this DVD  
Video Camera to be read by the PC.  
DVD-R disc cannot be  
played back on DVD-  
MovieAlbumSE.  
DVD-MovieAlbumSE does not support playback or data read on  
DVD-R disc: Use optional-user provided DVD video playback  
software to play back DVD-R disc on PC.  
138  
Error appears when  
starting DVD-  
Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to  
DirectX 8.1.  
MovieAlbumSE.  
Videowrittentoharddisk DVD-MovieAlbumSE cannot edit DVD-VR data stored on hard disk  
of PC cannot be edited of PC: Copy the data to another DVD-RAM disc and then edit it.  
on DVD-MovieAlbum  
copy tool.  
Movies are not  
recognized by  
Make sure the power switch of this DVD Video Camera is set to  
”, “ ” or “ ”.  
application in PC.  
The DISC EJECT lever While the DVD Video Camera is connected to PC, use Explorer to  
does not work when the right-click the DVD Video Camera drive icon and execute “Eject”.  
DVD Video Camera is  
connected to PC.  
161  
Reference  
page  
Symptom  
Cause and Correction  
The DVD-RAM drive of If DVD-MovieAlbumSE is running, terminate it.  
DVD Video Camera  
cannot be opened by PC  
Explorer or application.  
Error appears. Disc  
cannot be ejected.  
When the time stamp of ThefilesystemofthisDVDVideoCameraisoperatedonGreenwich  
file in DVD-RAM is  
viewed on PC, it is  
Mean Time (GMT), and time lag information has not been set. With  
Windows as of January, 2004, the time stamp of file viewed on  
®
different from the actual Explorer looks different from the actual recording time. The actual  
recording time.  
recording time will appear as date/time indication on playback  
screen.  
When DVD-  
Adiscotherthan DVD-RAMis loaded in drive:DVD-MovieAlbumSE  
cannot be used for media other than DVD-RAM.  
MovieAlbumSE is  
started, “Disc in Drive X:  
cannot be used”  
appears.  
Click the “Preference” button in the dialog box, click the “Device  
settingtabtochoosethedrivewhereDVD-RAMdiscisloadedinthe  
“Drive Select” column, and then click “OK”.  
141  
An image that should  
have been recorded  
Click the “Preference” button at top right of DVD-MovieAlbumSE  
screen, click the “Device Setting” tab to choose the drive where  
does not appear when DVD-RAMdiscisloadedinthe “DriveSelectcolumn, and thenclick  
DVD-MovieAlbumSE is “OK”.  
started.  
“DISC ERROR” appears A disc that was write-protected using the write-protect setting tool  
when releasing write-  
protect.  
(WPTOOL) equipped with the DVD-RAM driver on the CD-ROM  
provided with this DVD Video Camera cannot be released on this  
DVD Video Camera as is. Use the write-protect setting tool on PC  
to release the write-protect.  
NoUSB HS(high speed) Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with  
connection even when the USB2.0 card.  
USB2.0 card is used.  
You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker in  
order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed).  
Executing “Export” on  
DVD-MovieAlbumSEwill  
interrupt reading  
midway.  
Do not choose “Simple Export”: If you do, reading will stop midway.  
WhenexecutingExport” If stills are included in the range of “export”, it may take more time  
onDVD-MovieAlbumSE,  
it takes much time to  
read.  
because data must be re-encoded and read.  
IfDividebyMarkerisnotchosen, itmaytakesometimebecause  
data will be read while being re-encoded.  
141  
162  
Miscellaneous  
Symptom  
Reference  
page  
Cause and Correction  
Powerdoesnotcomeon, Execute system reset (press the RESET button).  
164  
ornooperationoccursby  
Has the DVD Video Camera been subjected to impact?  
pressing button.  
170  
The DVD Video Camera could be damaged. Please contact us.  
The date and time are  
incorrect.  
Has the DVD Video Camera been left unused for a long period of  
time?  
The internal backup memory battery may be discharged:  
Charge it.  
40  
96  
Noscenecanbedeleted. Is the cursor placed on the scene to be deleted?  
Iftheselectedscene(framedinred)exists,thatscenewillbedeleted  
even if you use yellow cursor to select any scene. Check the colors  
of cursors and bar graph on the thumbnail screen.  
Disc cannot be removed. Did you detach the battery pack or AC adaptor before setting the  
power switch to “OFF”?  
42, 45, 50  
37  
Connect the battery pack or AC adaptor, set the power switch to  
” and then “OFF”, and remove the disc.  
Is the remote controller pointed at the infrared receiver on DVD  
cannot be operated from Video Camera?  
DVD Video Camera  
remote controller.  
Point it at the infrared receiver to operate the DVD Video Camera.  
Is the infrared receiver on DVD Video Camera exposed to direct  
sunlight or strong fluorescent light, etc.?  
The remote controller cannot operate the DVD Video Camera when  
strong light strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the place or angle of  
the DVD Video Camera.  
37  
Is there a battery in the remote controller?  
Also check the polarities of battery. The battery could be dead: Try  
replacing it.  
36  
50  
46  
Is the DVD Video Camera powered?  
Turn it on.  
Disc cover cannot be  
closed.  
Is disc correctly inserted?  
Was disc inserted from wrong direction?  
Remove the disc and then reinsert it.  
Is disc inserted in wrong orientation?  
Remove the disc, and then reinsert it.  
46  
23  
Connect a fully charged battery pack or AC adaptor, and then turn  
the DVD Video Camera on.  
Cover will not open.  
Did you disconnect the battery pack or AC adaptor during removal  
ofdisc?ReconnectthebatterypackorACadaptor,andthenturnthe  
DVD Video Camera on.  
42, 45  
Operatingsoundisheard Thissoundisheardbecausethedisciscyclicallyoperatedanddoes  
cyclically. not indicate a fault.  
163  
System Reset  
IftheDVDVideoCameradoesnotoperatenormally,performSystemReset”:TheDVDVideoCameramay  
recover to normal. “System Reset” will reset all settings to factory defaults. The date and time will also be  
reset: Set the date and time again before using the DVD Video Camera.  
1
SetthepowerswitchtoOFFtoturntheDVDVideo  
Camera off.  
Detach the battery pack or AC adaptor.  
2
Useafinetippedpentoholddowntheresetbuttonfor  
several seconds.  
All settings will be reset.  
Note:  
Do not press the reset button with undue force.  
lList of setting items  
Setting  
method  
Item  
Default  
CameraFunctions Setup Program AE  
Auto  
Auto  
On  
P. 80  
P. 81  
P. 83  
P. 57  
P. 83  
P. 84  
P. 86  
P. 87  
P. 88  
P. 88  
P. 89  
P. 90  
P. 41  
P. 40  
P. 91  
White Bal.  
ElS  
Dig.Zoom  
40×  
Wind Cut  
Off  
Wide  
Record Functions Setup VIDEO Mode  
Quality  
4:3  
FINE  
FINE  
CAMERA  
Field  
Off  
Input Source  
PHOTO Input  
Self Timer  
OSD Output  
On  
Date Setup  
LCD Setup  
Date Mode  
Date Set  
M/D/Y  
JAN 1 2004 12:00AM  
Brightness  
Color Level  
P. 91  
Initial Setup  
Beep  
On  
P. 92  
P. 92  
P. 93  
P. 93  
Power Save  
Record LED  
Language  
Off  
On  
English  
* Some items will not appear depending on the disc or card inserted.  
164  
Major Specifications  
DVD Video Camera  
Information for your safety  
Power Source:  
DC 7.9/7.2 V  
Power Consumption:  
When recording with LCD monitor off  
VDR-M50PP approx. 4.9 W (in FINE mode)  
VDR-M70PP approx. 5.2 W (in FINE mode)  
CCD  
VDR-M50PP: 1/6-inch interlaced  
VDR-M70PP: 1/4-inch interlaced  
Total number of pixels  
VDR-M50PP: approx. 680,000  
VDR-M70PP: approx. 1,020,000  
Number of effective pixels  
VDR-M50PP: Movie:approx. 340,000  
Still: approx. 340,000  
VDR-M70PP: Movie:approx. 400,000  
(approx. 530,000 when 16:9 is set)  
Still: approx. 960,000  
Lens  
VDR-M50PP: F1.8-3.6, f = 1/16"-1-1/2" (2.1-37.8 mm)  
VDR-M70PP: F1.8-2.4, f = 3/16"-1-1/2" (3.8-38 mm)  
Filter diameter: 1-7/16" (37 mm)  
Focus  
Zoom  
Auto/Manual  
Optical 18× (VDR-M50PP), Optical 10x (VDR-M70PP), (40×-  
500x (VDR-M50PP), 40×- 240x (VDR-M70PP) with digital  
zoom added) 40x for still  
Required minimum illumination  
Viewfinder  
12 lx (3 lx : When Low Light mode is selected)  
0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels)  
2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels)  
Electronic type  
LCD monitor  
Electronic image stabilizer  
Shutter speed  
1/60 - 1/4000 second (movie)  
Self-timer recording  
External microphone jack  
Still recording only  
ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack: (a plug-in power type microphone  
cannot be used)  
Recording mode  
Movie (with sound)  
Still (with DVD-RAM disc, SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard)  
Maximum  
recordable time  
(per side)  
DVD-RAM disc  
DVD-R disc  
approx. 18 minutes (XTRA)  
approx. 30 minutes (FINE)  
approx. 60 minutes (STD)  
approx. 30 minutes (FINE)  
approx. 60 minutes (STD)  
approx. 30 minutes (LPCM)  
Maximumnumberof DVD-RAM disc  
999. However, if movies and stills are mixed on one disc, the  
recordable number will decrease.  
recordable stills  
(per side)  
SD Memory Card  
VDR-M50PP approx. 220 (in FINE mode)  
(when using 32 MB card) VDR-M70PP approx. 50 (in FINE mode)  
Varies depending on the recording quality and the type of card.  
(P. 33)  
165  
Recording format  
DVD-RAM disc  
Movie: Conforming to DVD Video Recording format  
(MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2)  
Still:  
Simultaneous recording, conforming to DVD Video  
Recording standard (704 × 480 pixels) and JPEG  
(VDR-M50PP: 640 × 480 pixels, VDR-M70PP: 1280 ×  
960 pixels)  
DVD-R disc  
Card  
Movie: Conforming to DVD Video Recording format  
(when MPEG 1 Audio layer 2 or LPCM* is selected)  
Still: Conforming to JPEG (VDR-M50PP: 640 × 480 pixels,  
VDR-M70PP: 1280 × 960 pixels) standard  
Audio playback format  
Recording media  
MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2, linear PCM, Dolby AC3  
8 cm DVD-RAM disc (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1)  
8 cm DVD-R disc (conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0)  
SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard  
Jacks  
Video/audio input/output × 1, External microphone input × 1,  
USB port (connected to PC USB port) × 1  
USB  
USB2.0 compliant (Hi-Speed)  
Lithium-ion  
Battery system  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
approx. 2-1/2"(W) × 3-1/2"(H) × 5-3/4" (D) inch  
[64 (W) × 89 (H) × 146 (D) mm] (excluding projections)  
Operating temperature (humidity)  
32-104 °F (0-40 °C) (less than 80%).  
32-86 °F (0-30 °C) when connected to PC  
Storage temperature  
Weight  
-4-140 °F (-20-60 °C)  
VDR-M50PP approx. 1.08 lbs (490 g )  
VDR-M70PP approx. 1.10 lbs (500 g )  
(without battery pack or disc)  
Total weight when recording  
Provided accessories  
VDR-M50PP approx. 1.27 lbs (575 g)  
VDR-M70PP approx. 1.29 lbs (585 g)  
(when using CGA-DU14A battery pack)  
AC adaptor/Charger, battery pack, AV/S input/output cable,  
remotecontroller, buttontypebatteryforremotecontroller, lens  
cap, lens cap string, shoulder belt, power cable, DC cord,  
software CD-ROM, USB cable, 8 cm DVD-RAM disc (in Round  
DVD Holder)  
* The MPEG 1 Audio Layer 2 format is a type of DVD Video standard. If your DVD player does not conform to  
MPEG 1Audio Layer 2, record inLPCM mode andthe finalized DVD-R disc canlater be played back on thatDVD player.  
.
166  
AC adaptor/Charger  
Information for your safety  
Power Source:  
Power Consumption:  
AC 110-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
19 W  
0.5 W (When not in use)  
DC 7.9 V, 1.4 A  
DC Output:  
(DVD Video Camera operation)  
DC 8.4 V, 0.65 A (Battery Charging)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Weight:  
approx. 2.40 (W) × 1.26 (H) × 3.58 (D) inch  
[61 (W) × 32 (H) × 91 (D) mm ]  
approx. 0.231 lbs (105 g)  
Note:  
Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.  
Designs and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.  
167  
Request for Service Notice  
(USA Only)  
Please photocopy this form when making a request for service notice.  
In the unlikely event this product needs service.  
Request for Service Notice:  
Please include your proof of purchase.  
(Failure to do so will delay your repair.)  
To further speed your repair, please provide  
an explanation of what wrong with the unit  
and any symptom it is exhibiting.  
Mail this completed form and your Proof of Purchase along with your unit to:  
Panasonic Services Company  
1705 N. Randall Road  
Elgin, IL. 60123-7847  
Attn: Camcorder Repair  
Please write the displayed above Self Diagnostic number here.  
168  
Limited Warranty  
(For USA Customers)  
PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS  
COMPANY,DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA  
ELECTRICCORPORATION OF AMERICA  
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094  
PANASONIC SALES COMPANY, DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA  
ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO, INC.,  
AVE. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5 San Gabriel Industrial Park,  
Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985  
Panasonic/Quasar Video Products  
Limited Warranty  
Limited Warranty Coverage  
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship, Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or  
Panasonic Sales Company (collectively referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,  
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or refurbished  
parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.  
Product  
Parts  
Labor  
Contact Number  
Service  
Ninety (90) Days  
Ninety (90) Days  
One (1) Year (except CCD Image Sensor)  
CCD Image Sensor - 6 (Six) Months  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
Carry-In or Mail-In  
Camcorder  
DVD/VCR Deck,  
A/V Mixer  
One (1) Year  
Ninety (90) Days  
Carry-In or Mail-In  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
Carry-In: 21”  
TV/VCR, TV/DVD,  
TV/DVD/VCR  
Combination  
Ninety (90) Days  
Ninety (90) Days  
CRTand Smaller  
In-Home or Carry-In:  
22” CRT and Larger  
One (1) Year (except CRT)  
CRT - Two (2) Years  
One (1) Year (except CRT)  
CRT - Two (2) Years  
Ninety (90) Days  
Ninety (90) Days  
TV/HDR  
Combination  
1-888-843-9788  
In-Home or Carry-In  
Rechargeable  
Batteries  
Ten (10) Days  
Not Applicable  
Carry-In or Mail-In  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
(in exchange for  
defective item)  
Tape  
(in exchange for  
defective item)  
Five (5) Days  
Not Applicable  
Not Applicable  
Carry-In or Mail-In  
Carry-In or Mail-In  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
Memory Cards  
(in exchange for  
defective item)  
Ninety (90) Days  
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts” warranty period, there will be no charge for parts.  
You must carry-in or mail-in your product or arrange for in-home service, as applicable, during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable  
batteries are included, they are not warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United States or  
Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or  
other proof of the original purchase date is required for warranty service.  
Carry-In, Mail-in or In-Home Service  
For Carry-In, Mail-In or In-HomeService (as applicable) in the United States call toll free contact number listed above or visit Panasonic  
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com  
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Sales Company (787)-750-4300 or fax (787)-768-2910.  
In-Home service, if applicable, requires clear, complete and easy access to the product by the authorized servicer and does not include  
removal or re-installation of an installed product. It is possible that certain in-home repairs will not be completed in-home, but will require  
that the product, or parts of the product, be removed for shop diagnosis and/or repair and then returned.  
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions  
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or  
cosmetic damage, nor does it cover markings or retained images on the picture tube resulting from viewing fixed images (including,  
among other things, letterbox pictures on standard 4:3 screen TV’s, or non-expanded standard 4:3 pictures on wide screen TV’s, or  
onscreen data in a stationary and fixed location). The warranty ALSO DOES NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or  
failures which are caused by products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse, abuse, neglect,  
mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper  
maintenance, power line surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office, restaurant, or other  
business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is  
attributable to acts of God.  
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”.  
THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM  
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANYBREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.  
(As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, cost of having someone remove or re-install an installed unit if applicable, or travel  
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other memory or recorded content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are  
for illustration only.)  
ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, ARE  
LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied  
warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights  
which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer  
or Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the  
addresses listed for the warrantor.  
PARTS AND SERVICE (INCLUDING COST OF AN IN-HOME SERVICE CALL, WHERE APPLICABLE) WHICH  
ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.  
169  
Customer Services Directory  
Customer Services Directory  
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or  
Servicenter; purchase Parts and Accessories; or make Customer Service and  
Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:  
http://www.panasonic.com/support  
or, contact us via the web at:  
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo  
You may also contact us directly at:  
1-800-211-PANA (7262),  
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.  
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855  
Accessory Purchases  
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic  
Products by visiting our Web Site at:  
http://www.pasc.panasonic.com  
or, send your request by E-mail to:  
npcparts@panasonic.com  
You may also contact us directly at:  
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)  
Panasonic Services Company  
20421 84th Avenue South,  
Kent, WA 98032  
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)  
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277  
Service in Puerto Rico  
Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc. Panasonic Sales Company  
Factory Servicenter:  
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park,  
Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985  
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910  
170  
Warranty  
(For Canadian Customers)  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3  
PANASONIC PRODUCT – LIMITED WARRANTY  
Panasonic Canada Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship and agrees to remedy any  
such defect for a period as stated below from the date of original purchase.  
Camcorder Product – One (1) year, parts and labour  
LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS  
This warranty does not apply to products purchased outside Canada or to any product which has been improperly installed,  
subjected to usage for which the product was not designed, misused or abused, damaged during shipping, or which has been  
altered or repaired in any way that affects the reliability or detracts from the performance, nor does it cover any product which is  
used commercially. Dry cell batteries are also excluded from coverage under this warranty.  
This warranty is extended to the original end user purchaser only. A purchase receipt or other proof of date of original purchase  
is required before warranty service is performed.  
THIS EXPRESS, LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCLUDING  
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT WILL PANASONIC CANADA INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES.  
In certain instances, some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or the  
exclusion of implied warranties, so the above limitations and exclusions may not be applicable.  
WARRANTY SERVICE  
For product operation and information assistance, please contact your Dealer or our Customer Care Centre at:  
Telephone #: (905) 624-5505  
Fax #: (905) 238-2360  
Web: www.panasonic.ca  
For product repairs, please contact one of the following:  
Your Dealer who will inform you of an authorized Servicentre nearest you.  
Our Customer Care Centre at (905) 624-5505 or www.panasonic.ca  
A Panasonic Factory Servicentre listed below:  
Richmond, British Columbia  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
12111 Riverside Way  
Richmond, BC V6W 1K8  
Tel: (604) 278-4211  
Calgary, Alberta  
Mississauga, Ontario  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Dr.  
Lachine, Quebec  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
th  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
3075, rue Louis A. Amos  
Lachine, QC H8T 1C4  
Tel: (514) 633-8684  
Fax: (514) 633-8020  
6835-8 St. N. E.  
Calgary, AB T2E 7H7  
Tel: (403) 295-3955  
Fax: (403) 274-5493  
Mississauga, ON L4W 2T3  
Tel: (905) 624-8447  
Fax: (905) 238-2418  
Fax: (604) 278-5627  
IF YOU SHIP THE PRODUCT TO A SERVICENTRE  
Carefully pack and send prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.  
Include details of the defect claimed, and proof of date of original purchase.  
171  
MEMO  
172  
173  
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,  
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America  
Executive Office:  
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094  
(201) 348-7000  
Panasonic Company East: 6749 Baymeadow Drive, Glen Burnie, MD 21060  
Panasonic Company Central: 1707 North Randall Road, Elgin, IL 60123  
Panasonic Company West: 6550 Katella Avenue, Cypress, CA 90630  
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America  
Panasonic Sales Company  
Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Ave. 65 de Infanteria, Km. 9.5, Carolina, PR 00985  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, ON, L4W 2T3  
P

Radio Shack PLRDVD7 User Manual
RAD Data comm RAD Data Communications Cable Box RSD 20 User Manual
Philips Car Speaker hts3565d User Manual
Parrot Bluetooth Headset MK6100 User Manual
KTI Networks TRI SEGMENT MEDIA KCD 302 User Manual
Kicker SOLO BARIC S15L7 User Manual
Kenwood KDC MP149 User Manual
Kenwood eXcelon KDC X789 User Manual
Kenwood Car Amplifier KAC 6203 User Manual
JVC KD LX333 User Manual